SECONDARY  IMPACT ASSESSMENT  MANUAL
                                                                 i, cl.c.

-------
EPA WA-B064
                    SECONDARY IMPACT ASSESSMENT MANUAL
                              January 1981
                              Prepared for:

                     Office of Environmental Review
                  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                            Washington,  D.C.
                              Prepared by:

              Urban Systems Research and Engineering,  Inc.
                           36 Boylston Street
                           Cambridge,  MA 02138

-------
                             TABLE OF  CONTENTS
Chapter 1:   Introduction and Organization

      1.1:   Introduction
      1.2:   Definition of Secondary  Impacts
      1.3:   Rationale for this User  Manual and  for  Levels A,
      1.4:   Scope of this Manual
      1.5:   Organization of this Manual
                                                 B,  a C
                                                              1-1
                                                              1-1
                                                              1-3
                                                              1-5
                                                              1-6
Chapter 2:  Level A Analysis

      2.1:  Introduction to Level A Analysis
      2.2:  Step 1:  Suggested Level A Screening Questions
      2.3:  Step 2:  Apply Level A Decision Criteria
      2.4:  Summary of Level A Analysis

Chapter 3:  Level B Analysis
      3.1:
      3.2:
      3.3;
      3.4:
      3.5;
      3.6:
      3.7:

      3.8:
      3.9:
     3.10:

     3.11:
     3.12:
     3.13:
Introduction to Level B Analysis
Note to EPA Regional Office Users of This Manual
Step 1:  Define the Impact Area
         Estimate Direct Employment
         Calculate Nonlocal Employment
         Calculate Indirect Employment
         Calculate Direct and Indirect Population
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 5:
Effects
Step 6:
Step 7:
Step 8:
Required
Step 9:
         Estimate the Number of New Households
         Review the Existing Housing Market
         Estimate the Number of New Housing Units
         Review Selected Physical Impacts
Step 10: Apply Level B Decision Criteria
Step 11: Prepare an Assessment Summary
Chapter 4:  Level C Analysis

      4.1:  Introduction to Level C
      4.2:  Format of Chapter 4
      4.3:  Step 1:  Define the Impact Area
      4.4:  Step 2:  Describe the Existing Environment in
            the Impact Area
      4.5:  Step 3:  Do a Baseline Projection of the Impact
            Area Without the Project
      4.6:  Step 4:  Estimate Direct Employment
                                                              2-1
                                                              2-1
                                                              2-7
                                                              2-8
3-1
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-7
3-10

3-10
3-15
3-18

3-18
3-19
3-20
                                                             4-1
                                                             4-3
                                                             4-3
                                                             4-5

                                                             4-12

                                                             4-14

-------
                                                                          Page


      4.7:   Step 5:   Calculate Nonlocal Employment                        4-15
      4.8:   Step 6:   Calculate Indirect Employment                        4-16
      4.9:   Step 7:   Calculate Direct and Indirect                        4~17
            Population Effects
     4.10:   Step 8:   Estimate the Number of New Households                4-17
     4.11:   Step 9:   Review the Existing Housing Market                   4-18
     4.12:   Step 10:  Estimate the Number of New Housing                   4-19
            Units Required
     4.13:   Step 11:  Allocate New Housing Units Among                     4-21
            Communities
     4.14:   Step 12:  Calculate Residential Site Requirements              4-22
            for New Housing Units
     4.15:   Step 13:  Allocate New Housing Units Within Communities        4-23
     4.16:   Step 14:  Estimate New Residential Infrastructure              4-25
            Demands
     4.17:   Step 15:  Estimate Site Requirements for Service Sector        4-33
            Development
     4.18:   Step 16:  Assess Air Pollution Impacts                         4-36
     4.19:   Step 17:  Assess Impacts from Stormwater Runoff                4-38
     4.20:   Step 18:  Assess Noise Impacts                                 4-55
     4.21:   Step 19:  Assess Pesticides Impacts                    '     .   4~67
     4.22:   Step 20:  Assess Impacts on Sensitive Areas                    4-68
     4.23:   Step 21:  Identify Known Colocators                            4~"71
     4.24:   Step 22:   Calculate the Site Requirements of Known            4-72
            Colocators
     4.25:   Step 23:  Calculate the Infrastructure Requirements            4-72
            of Known Colocators
     4.26:   Step 24:  Prepare the Environmental Impact Statement           4~73

Appendix I.A.:  Equation for Indirect Employment and Population           I.A-1
     Impacts

Appendix I.E.:  Calculating Costs for Standard Facilities                 I.B-1

Appendix I.e.:  Summary of Construction Worker Case Studies               I.C-1
     List of Sources for Construction Worker Case Studies                 I.C-3

Appendix I.D.:  Nationwide Average Motor Vehicle Emission Rates           I.D-1
     For NMHC, CO, and NOX

Appendix I.E.:  Nationwide Average Motor Vehicle Emission Rates for       I.E-1
     TSP, Pb, and SOV
                    Ji

Appendix I.F.:  OBERS Methodology                                         I.F-1

Appendix I.G.:  Alternative Formulation of the Baseline Projection        I.G-1

Appendix I.H.:  Explanation of Standard Industrial Classification         I.H-1
     System

-------
Appendix I.J.:  Explanation of Figure 7, "Secondary Impacts             I.J-1
     Assessment Flowchart"

Appendix II.A:  Infrastructure Standards                               II.A-1

     List of Sources for Instructure Standards                         II.A-36

Appendix II.B.:  Bibliography #1 - List of Sources Used to              B.l-1
     Prepare this Manual

Appendix II.C.:  Bibliography #2 - Review of Modeling Literature        B.2-1

Appendix II.D.:  Glossary                                              II.D-1

-------
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

Figure 1 :
Figure 2 :
Figure 3 :
Figure 4:
Table 1:
Table 2:
Figure 5:
Table 3:
Table 4:
Figure 6:
Figure 7 :
Figure 8 :
Table 5:
Table 6:
Figure 9:
Table 7:
Figure 10:
Table 8:
(Part

Hypothetical Impact Chain of a Facility or Project
Flowchart of Level A Activities
Proposed Questions for Screening Potential Secondary
Impacts
Flowchart of Level B Activities
Project Employment - Warner Valley Station,
Washington County, Utah
Major Economic Sectors
Sample Calculation of Indirect Employment and
Population Impacts
Calculation of Employment Multiplier for Albany-
Schnectady- Troy, 1978
Extract from 1970 Census of Housing for Batavia,
New York
Example of an Assessment Summary for Secondary
Impacts (Level B)
Secondary Impacts Assessment Flowchart
Flowchart of Level C Activities
Means of Transportation by Distance to Work
Means of Transportation by Travel Time to Work
Example of Different Vacancy Rate Assumptions (Step 10)
Suggested Housing Densities
Sample Application of Step 11, "Allocate New Housing
Units Within Communities," and Step 12, "Calculate
Residential Site Requirements."
Type of New Units and Site Requirements
of Figure 10 Sample Application)
Page
1-2
2-2
2-4
3-2
3-5
3-9
3-11
3-14
3-16
3-22
4-2
4-4
4-6
4-7
4-22
4-25
4-29
4-31


-------
Figure 11:  Estimating New Residential Infrastructure Demands               4-35
             (Step 14)

Table 9:    Composite Motor Vehicle Emission Rates for Low-                 4-42
            Altitude Regions

Table 10:   Composite Motor Vehicle Emission Rates for                      4-43
            California

Table 11:   Composite Motor Vehicle Emission Rates for High-                4-44
            Altitude Regions

Figure 12:  Normal Seasonal Heating Degrees-Days  (Base 65° F),              4-46
            1941-1970

Figure 13:  Annual Air Conditioner Compressor Operating Hours               4-47
            for Residential Structures

Figure 14:  Example of the Application of Step 16, "Assess Air              4-51
            Pollution Impacts"

Figure 15:  Effects of Urbanization on Volume and Rates of Surface          4-56
            Runoff

Table 12:   Effect of Changing Land Use on Storm Runoff from                4-57
            470-Acre Subarea

Figure 16:  Runoff Coefficient Determination from Land Cover                4-60
            Information

Table 13:   x Factors             •                                          4~61

Figure 17:  Example of the Application of Step 17, "Assess Impacts         4-63
            from Stormwater Runoff"

Table 14:   "a" Factors Given Cv(i)                                        4-65

Figure 18:  Sources to Contact to Identify Sensitive Areas                 4-69


Appendix Figures and Tables

Table E-l:  Pooled Average Lead Content of Gasoline Burned by             I.E-2
            Vehicle Population

Table E-2:  Average Fleet Fuel Economy                                    I.E-3

Figure G-l: Representative Growth Scenarios (Case 1)                       I.G-3

-------
                                                                           Paqe
Figure G-2:

Figure J-l:

Figure J-2:

Figure J-3:


Table II-l:

Table II-2:

Table II-3:

Table II-4:


Table II-5:


Table II-6:


Table II-7:

Table II-8:

Table II-9:
Table

Table

Table

Table

Table

Table

Table

Table

Table
11-10:

11-11:

11-12:

11-13:

11-14:

11-15:

11-16:

11-17:

11-18:
Representative Growth  Scenarios  (Case  2)

Residentially-Related  Secondary  Impacts Flowchart

Comprehensive Secondary  Impacts  Flowchart

Secondary Impacts Assessment Flowchart (Detailed
Version)

Normal Water Consumption

Required Water Supply  for Domestic Use and Fire Flow

Average Water Use by Type of Establishment

Basic Water Distribution Standards by  Housing Type
(per 1000 Dwelling Units)

Sewage Generation Rates  for Commercial and Public
Establishments

Basic Sewage Standards by Housing Type
(per 1000 Dwelling Units)

Solid Waste Service Standards

Required Fire Flow, by Population

Space Criteria for Hospital Evaluation
(In Gross Square Feet Per Bed)

Standards for Recreational Activities

Minimum Recreation Standards

Recreation Demand for Specific Types of Facilities

Maintenance Requirements for Parks and Playgrounds

Description of Library Characteristics

General Standards for Libraries

Guidelines for Small Libraries

Guidelines for Periodical Collections
    •
Standards for Library Operating Hours
I.G-4

I. J-2

I.J-3

I.J-4


II.A-7

II.A-8

II.A-9

II.A-12


II.A-13


II.A-14


II.A-15

II.A-16

II.A-17


II.A-18

II.A-19

II.A-20

II.A-21

II.A-22

II.A-23

II.A-24

II.A-25

II.A-26

-------
                                                                         Page
Table 11-19:  Pupil Generation Rates by Type of Dwelling                 II.A-27




Table 11-20:  General Requirements for Nursery Schools                   II.A-29




Table 11-21:  Elementary School General Requirements                     II.A-30




Table 11-22:  Junior High School General Requirements                    II.A-31




Table 11-23:  Senior High School General Requirements                    II.A-32




Table 11-24:  Secondary School Staff                                     II.A-33




Table 11-25:  General Requirements for Roads and Highways                II.A-34




Table 11-26:  Characteristics of Shopping Centers       .                 II.A-35

-------
                    ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
     As with any research project that spans over two years,
there have been a number of important contributors to the
final product.  These contributors and advisors include
individuals at USRSE, as well as a number of people outside
the firm.

     First and foremost, I want to particularly thank Michael
Alford, the original director of this project at USR&E, who
dealt with many of the difficult methodological issues that
arose during the first months.  Christopher Pleatsikas. Peter
Hall, and Dr. James Hudson, all from USR&E, contributed to the
difficult discussions which led to the simplified model of
secondary impacts.

     I owe a special debt to Holly Stanton.  During the period
wher^ the draft version of the manual was being put together,
she was indefatigable and always enthusiastic in researching
data sources and methodologies; she performed many tasks which
made my responsibilities somewhat less arduous.

     Robert McMahon and Peter Guldberg contributed their
special expertise to this project.  Peter was responsible
for the thorough methodology for assessing secondary air
pollution impacts; Bob wrote the section on storxnwater run-
off and commented on the entire draft user manual.

     This contract has had two EPA project officers. While
this could have created some difficulties, I am pleased that
the final user manual has had the benefit of the comments
of both of these individuals.  Robert Pickett was the
project' officer until February 1980, at which point John
Meagher assumed that responsibility.  John provided detailed
critical comment on the outline of the user manual, which
made the production of the draft and the final manual much
easier.

     Finally, Jill Jackson  was responsible for the production
of many of the early documents and memoranda for this contract.
Martha Connolly and Valerie Bradley were responsible for the
considerable effort required to produce the user manual.  Too
often the production of a document such as this manual is assumed
to be an easy task, but we know better.  Without Martha and
Valerie, this user manual would not have been possible.

-------
                                ABSTRACT
     This user manual is designed specifically for the assessment of the
secondary impacts of any type of new development activity.  A full range
of secondary impacts is considered.  The manual consists of a three-level
review process — Levels A, B, and C.  Within this framework projects
without significant secondary impacts can be screened early in the environ-
mental assessment process; the user need not resort to a full EIS in every
case.  Intended users of this manual are the EPA regional offices, state
environmental review agencies, contractors for these agencies, and other
interested parties to the environmental review process.  Chapter 1 of the
manual provides an introduction to the three-level framework; Chapters 2,  3,
and 4 present the three levels of analysis, each of which has its own set
of procedures.

-------
                                Chapter 1

                      INTRODUCTION AND ORGANIZATION
1.1  INTRODUCTION

     This document, written for EPA's Office of Environmental Review, is
concerned with assessment of the secondary impacts of new source industries
under the NPDES program.  Structured as a user manual for EPA regional
offices and other environmental review organizations, this document com-
prises a three-stage and progressively more detailed step-by-step procedure
for assessing secondary impacts.  This three-stage procedure (termed Level
A, B, and C, respectively) provides two decision points at which you can
reach a finding of no significant impact without producing an environmental
impact statement or doing further analysis of the project.  Although written
in the C9ntext of EPA's new source NPDES program, the procedures discussed
in this manual can be used in other environmental review programs to assess
the secondary impacts of any type of facility or project.

1.2  DEFINITION OF SECONDARY IMPACTS

     Secondary impacts of a project or facility are indirect or induced
changes in the physical or social environment.  Secondary impacts are
triggered by direct (primary) impacts.  For the purposes of the discussion
in this manual, secondary impacts are also defined as those impacts which
occur off-site from a project or any associated infrastructure (such as
barge landings or rail facilities) which is an essential part of the opera-
tion of the project.

     The example in Figure 1 illuminates the definition.  Note that this
example is hypothetical and includes only a portion of the potential primary
and secondary impacts associated with a facility or project.  In this
example, the primary impact is the direct employment requirements of the
facility.  This employment demand includes both the construction and operation
phases.  Other primary impacts may include direct physical impacts (e.g., air
or water pollution) or direct infrastructure requirements (e.g., access roads
or facilities for self-generation of power).

     Looking only at the direct employment impact in the example, a number
of potential secondary impacts may be triggered.  All of the impacts to the
right of the dotted line are considered secondary impacts.
                                      1-1

-------
New Source






Direct
Employme






1
1
I
1

.
.
int | ^
1
f ,_
' V

1
1
1










Indirect Employment
1
Population Chan
1 !
Service
Employment

ge —



                                    Site and
                                  Infrastructure
                                   Requirements
                                       1
                                   Residential
                                     Growth
Physical Environmental
       Impacts
     o  Air
     o  Water
     o  Noise
     o  Sensitive Areas
     o  Pesticides
Figure 1   Hypothetical Impact Chain of a Facility or Project

-------
     There are several relevant issues involved in analyzing and measuring
secondary impacts:

     •  successful measurement of these impacts is directly related
        to the quantification of the preceding impacts;

     •  it is important to analyze cumulative impacts.  A given
        secondary impact (such as secondary air .pollution)  may be
        the result of several different previous impacts - the
        cumulative  effects of all of these stimuli must be
        considered;

     •  the likelihood of secondary impacts occurring is highly
        dependent on the magnitude and the occurrence of the
        preceding impact.  For example, if there is no population
        change in a community, then secondary physical impacts
        resulting from residential growth are unlikely to
        occur.

     Figure 7 in Chapter 4 provides a considerably more detailed and complete
flowchart of secondary impacts.  Appendix I.J. explains Figure 7, and is
designed for the reader interested in more explanation about the reasons that
secondary impacts occur.

1.3  RATIONALE FOR THIS USER MANUAL AND FOR LEVELS A, B, AND C

     A major goal of this user manual is to increase the perception on the
part of EPA regional offices, state environmental review agencies, contractors
for these agencies,and other interested parties that secondary impacts, in and
of themselves, are important.  This goal is the rationale for a user manual
devoted to secondary impacts, and is also the rationale for the concept of a
three-level review process devoted to these impacts alone.  Although the
techniques included in the user manual were conceived in light of the resources
and practices of the EPA regional offices, these techniques are easily adapt-
able to the requirements of any user responsible for the review of secondary
impacts.

     The techniques in this user manual are incorporated into a three-level
review process.  The three-level structure is consistent with the assumption
that projects without significant secondary impacts can be screened early in
the environmental review process; you need not resort to a full EIS to make
this determination.  Each of the three levels consists of specific techniques.
Briefly the three levels can be summarized in the following terms:

     •  Level A is a screening procedure based on a brief set of
        possible questions listed in Chapter 2.  These questions
        are suggestions of the types of issues you should raise
        with the applicant.  The list is not a formal questionnaire
        to be directed to all applicants, because NEPA regulations
        require that you treat each facility on a case-by-case basis.
                                          1-3

-------
Level A is designed to screen, based on four specific
criteria given in Chapter 2, those projects which
definitely will have no significant secondary impacts.
If there is any doubt on your part about the potential
for these impacts, a Level B or C analysis is required.

The output of Level A is part of an environmental assess-
ment supporting the finding of no significant (secondary)
impact, in those cases where the Level A analysis results
in this decision, or a brief internal memorandum stating
the need for further analysis of the project.

Level B analysis is directed to a community audience and
focuses primarily on socioeconomic impacts.  We recommend
that the data for this analysis be supplied primarily by
the applicant or readily available published data sources,
thereby significantly reducing the burden upon the reviewer.

In those cases where the Level B review is being carried out
by an EPA regional office, data collected from the applicant
or from these published sources can be organized in the form
of an Environmental Information Document.

At Level B, quantification of socioeconomic impacts is required,
but quantification of secondary 'physical impacts is not required.
However, at Level B, you should do a qualitative review of air,
water, and sensitive area impacts, focusing on issues such as
local controls over sensitive area development, and the present
air and water quality situation in the impact area.  If the
Level B criteria indicate that there are potential effects of
the project sufficient to require an EIS, then secondary
physical impacts can be treated in considerable detail, with
quantification, at Level C.

The output of Level B is a short paper which quantifies
socioeconomic impacts, and which points out any potential
secondary physical impacts resulting from residential
growth.  Ideally, this paper, which can be part of an
environmental assessment, requires a limited effort on your
part to modify information provided primarily by the appli-
cant or from published sources.

The principal product of the Level C analysis is that section
of an environmental impact statement devoted to the secondary
impacts of the new source.  This analysis will cover both
socioeconomic and physical secondary impacts.  The effort
required on your part to carry out the Level C procedures
                               1-4

-------
        is consistent with recent current practices concerning the
        preparation of EISs by the regional offices, regional
        office contractors, and state review groups, and is also
        consistent with the intent of CEQ to have EPA and other
        agencies produce environmental impact statements which
        are "analytic, rather than encyclopedic," with "impacts
        discussed in proportion to their significance."*

1.4  SCOPE OF THIS MANUAL

     Each user of this manual should be aware of its limitations and intended
uses.  This manual was written under the sponsorship of EPA's Office of
Environmental Review.  It is intended that this manual be used solely for
assessment of the secondary impacts resulting from the location of new facili-
ties.  Although written under a contract concerned with new source facilities
for which an NPDES permit is being sought, the techniques in this manual have
wider application to all types of projects undergoing environmental review,
and we encourage this use of the manual.  However, although there are techni-
ques in this manual that are relevant to the assessment of primary (direct)
impacts, we do not intend that the techniques be used for that purpose.

     This manual is designed to be used for assessment of secondary impacts.
This is not a manual of mitigation measures.

     The appropriate users of this manual are the enforcement branch and
environmental impact branch of the EPA regional offices; state and local
agencies responsible for environmental review; interested parties to the
review process; and any firms or individuals under contract to prepare an
environmental impact statement for a new facility.  All of these parties can
benefit from the procedures given in this manual.

     An underlying assumption of this manual is that, although the secondary
imapcts of a project can be significant, it is appropriate, given resource
constraints on the part of EPA regional offices and other users, to assess
these impacts using less complex, yet accurate, techniques.  The reliance
on simplifying assumptions and rules-of-thumb is consistent with the limited
resources available to the regional offices and other prospective users, and
should increase the utilization of this manual.

     In preparing this manual, we reviewed existing mathematical models and
other methodologies for secondary impact assessment.**  This review included
gravity models for the allocation of residential growth, cohort-survival
models for the analysis of labor force availability, and boomtown models for
*40 CPR 1502.2(a) and  (b).

**Urban Systems Research  & Engineering, Inc.  "Induced Impacts of New Source
Industries:  Study and EIS Preparation Manual Development," Report #5—Review
of Modeling Literature, for Office of Federal Activities, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, September 6, 1979.
                                        1-5

-------
the study of the problems of rapid growth in smaller communities.  In
general, no comprehensive model or methodologies for assessing secondary
impacts from the siting of new facilities exist.  The existing techniques
typically provide an exceedingly detailed analysis of a single or small
group of secondary impact areas, and are inappropriate as substitutes for
the specific procedures in this manual.  Therefore, although you may wish
to substitute specific methodologies for selected impact areas, we do not
recommend this approach.

1.5  ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

     The next three chapters of this manual are devoted respectively to Levels
A, B, and C, the purposes of which have been briefly discussed in this chapter.
Throughout each chapter examples, incorporated into figures or tables, are
used to explain specific techniques or problems.  These figures and tables
supplement the text, and are not meant to interrupt it.

     The appendices provide information integral to the user manual; this
information has been put at the end of the manual to enhance its readability.
Included are detailed examples of specific procedures, tables of infrastruc-
ture standards, and other elements which are important, but too lengthy to
be easily incorporated into the body of the manual.  Reference is made to
these appendices throughout the next three chapters.
                                         1-6

-------
                                Chapter 2

                            LEVEL A ANALYSIS
2.1  INTRODUCTION TO LEVEL A ANALYSIS

     The purpose of Level A is to determine whether new residential develop-
ment will be required to accommodate the direct and indirect employment
demands of the facility.  The major elements of the Level A analysis include
(see Figure 2):

     •  an initial telephone or mail contact with the applicant

     •  an initial meeting with the applicant

     •  a request by the reviewer that the applicant complete
        preliminary application materials.(D  These materials
        should include information about some of the issues
        raised by the questions shown in Figure 3.  Figure 3
        is not a formal questionnaire to be answered by all
        permit applicants.

     •  a decision by the reviewer as to whether the applicant's
        facility qualifies as a new source.

     •  a decision either 1) that additional, more detailed
        analysis of the new source application is required
        to determine potential secondary impacts, or 2)  that
        construction or operation of the new source will
        result in no significant impacts, in which case an
        environmental assessment must be written to support
        this finding.  The criteria for these decisions are
        outlined below.

2.2  STEP 1:   SUGGESTED LEVEL A SCREENING QUESTIONS

     The preliminary application materials typically requested of new source
applicants are often oriented toward primary, rather than secondary, impacts.
To provide a proper basis for the assessment of secondary impacts, we have
provided a list of possible questions in Figure 3.
                                       2-1

-------
                              Initial
                              Contact
                              Initial
                              Meeting
   LEVEL A
                            Preliminary
                            Application
                             Materials
                            New Source
                           Determination
                                               Step 1:
                                           Suggested Level
                                             A Screening
                                              Questions
                           Preliminary
                             NEPA
                                               Step 2:
                                           Apply Level A
                                              Decision
                                              Criteria
         Areawide
        Assessment
  BID or Other
Data Collection
    Source
                  Figure 2.   Flowchart of Level A Activities.
FNSI » finding of no significant impact
EIS  = environmental impact statement
EID  » environmental information document
Areawide assessment - see glossary
                                          2-2

-------
     We are not proposing a formal standardized Level A questionnaire because
current NEPA regulations require that facilities be treated on a case-by-case
basis.  This implies that a formal, structured questionnaire to be answered
by all applicants is inappropriate for the initial assessment of potential
secondary impacts.

     The questions in Figure 3, therefore, are meant to suggest information
that you should obtain from the applicant or from other sources noted in
the questions.  We recommend that, fo± each facility, you consider the issues
raised by the questions.
     On May 19, 1980, EPA issued consolidated permit program requirements
governing the Hazardous Waste Management program under the Resource Conser-
vation and Recovery Act (RCRA) , the Underground Injection Control Program
under the Safe Drinking Water Act, the Prevention of Significant Deterioration
(PSD) Program under the Clean Air Act, and the National Pollutant Discharge
Elimination System Program and State Dredge or Pill ("404") programs under
the Clean Water Act.  These requirements include specific forms that are to
be used by EPA and State agencies who are requesting information from permit
applicants.  Questions 1 and 3 in Figure 3 are consistent with the consoli-
dated permitting requirements.  The other questions in the Figure are
necessary to properly screen for secondary impacts, but these questions do
not conflict with and are also consistent with the consolidated permitting
requirements .

     Reference is made throughout the questions to the impact area.  The
impact area at Level A is defined as the county containing the new source
facility (the 'host county1), and any county contiguous to the host county.
This definition is simple , but provides a reasonable approximation of the
impact area, consistent with the initial screening function of Level A.

     Note that Questions 2, 3, and 4 in Figure 3 are concerned with a geo-
graphic area more limited than the impact area, as defined above.  These
three questions are concerned only with the more immediate area around the
site of the facility.  Questions 2 refers particularly to an area  (the area
of operation) within a mile of, and including, the facility, whereas Ques-
tions 3 and 4 refer to a larger area within five to 10 miles of, and
including,  the facility.

     The 23 questions in Figure 3 are intended to focus on the potential
for secondary impacts, although these questions may also serve to screen
for potential primary impacts.  We have developed this list of possible
questions for screening secondary impacts because 1) there is often
little or no comprehensive assessment of these impacts by environmental
reviewers,  and b) secondary impacts alone may be sufficient grounds for
denying a permit.

     These questions are not unduly difficult for the applicant to answer.
Some of the information required does presuppose that the applicant has made


  40  CFR 122  to  125.
                                        2-3

-------
                                Figure 3

  PROPOSED qUESTIONS FOR SCREENING POTENTIAL SECONDARY IMPACTS   (LEVEL A)


1.  What is your Standard Industrial Classification number?  If more than one
    SIC applies to your facility, list up to four in descending order of
    importance.

2.  Submit a topographic map of the proposed operation area; this map should
    extend at least one mile beyond property boundaries.  The suggested source
    for this is a USGS topographical map  (1:24,000 scale).  You should include
    the following information on the map:

    a)  the outline of the facility

    b)  the location of each of its proposed and existing intake and
        discharge structures

    c)  the location of each hazardous waste treatment, storage, or
        disposal facility

    d)  the location of each well where fluid is injected underground

    e)  the location of all springs, rivers, and other surface water
        bodies in the map area.

3.  Check the categories which best describe the area surrounding the site on
    which the proposed facility will be constructed, i.e., the area shown on
    the above map.

       .	  Urban                         	  Shopping Center

       	  Suburban                      	  Industrial Park
               Small Town                    	  Commercial Strip

               Rural                         	  Housing Development
               Other (explain)
4.  Submit a more general location map (8-1/2 by 11 inches) which shows town
    and highway numbers, and which pinpoints the proposed area of operation.

5.  Is your facility to be constructed near lands of 25 percent or greater
    slope?  If this information is unknown, consult the topographical map
    submitted in response to Question #2 above, available from USGS.
                                           2-4

-------
                            Figure 3 continued


6.   Are there any sites of historic, architectural, or archeological or
     cultural value within the impact area?  If so, please name them.
     If this information is unknown, contact the Division of Cultural
     Resources at the regional office of the Department of the Interior
     and refer to the National Register of Historic Places, or contact
     the State Historic Preservation Officer.

7.   Are there any endangered species known to inhabit the impact area?
     If so, name them.  If this information is unknown, contact the
     Office of Endangered Species under the Office of Federal Assistance,
     U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service at the regional office of the Depart-
     ment of the Interior.  Refer to the Federal Register of Endangered
     Species.  Information on marine species may also be obtained from the
     Office of Marine Mammals and Endangered Species of the National Marine
     Fisheries Service, which operates under the National Oceanic and
     Atmospheric Administration.

8.   Does the impact area contain a State or federally designated wild
     and scenic river, or one authorized for further study?  If so,
     please name that river.  If this information is unknown, please
     contact the Heritage Conservation and Recreation Service of the
     regional office of the Department of the Interior.

9.   Does the impact area contain a local, state or Federal recreation area?
     If so, please name them.  If Federal recreation areas are unknown,
     contact the National Park Service of the regional office of the Depart-
     ment of the Interior.

10.  Does the impact area contain wetlands or floodplains?  If so, please
     name them.  If this information is unknown, please contact the Environ-
     mental Office of the U.S. Fish & Wildlife Service of the regional
     office of the Department of Interior.  State departments of fish and
     game are also a source for this information.

11.  Does the impact area contain significant agricultural lands?  If unknown,
     please contact the Soil Conservation Service at the regional office of
     the Department of Agriculture.

12.  is any portion of the impact area within a coastal zone?  If this is
     unknown, contact the State Coastal Zone Management Office.   (Usually
     a subdivision of the State Office of Environmental Affairs or Natural
     Resources Division.)  While the state office is a preferable source of
     information, the Coastal Zone Information Center at the National
     Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration  (NOAA) or the Director of the
     State Programs Office at NOAA also can provide pertinent information.
                                      2-5

-------
                          Figure 3 continued


13.  Does the impact area contain an aquifer or other source of-potable
     water?  If this is unknown, contact the State Water Resources
     Division, which, in conjunction with the United States Geological
     Survey, broadly maps the aquifers in:the state.  For a more specific
     delineation, contact the local Board of Health.

14.  Are any mandatory Class I PSD areas located in the impact area?  If
     this information is unknown, contact a) the state air agency, and
     speak with an individual responsible for the state implementation
     plan (SIP), or b) the Air and Hazardous Materials Division of the
     EPA Regional Office that serves your state.

15.  Is the impact area attainment, nonat'tainment, or unclassified in terms
     of meeting national ambient air quality standards (NAAQS)?  If this
     information is unknown, contact the same sources listed under Question
     14.

16.  What is the expected employment of your facility when operating at
     capacity?

17.  What is the expected employment of your facility during the peak
     construction phase?  (See Appendix I.C and the last paragraph of
     Chapter 3, Section 3.8, for a discussion of possible impacts caused
     by construction workers.)

18.  HOW many employees will have to move into the area to satisfy your
     employment requirements a)  for the peak construction phase, b) for
     operations?

19.  How many new housing units will be required to accommodate the number
     of employees during the peak construction period?

20.  Are there any other businesses of which you are aware that are moving
     into the area to supply materials to or purchase products from your
     operation specifically?

21..  Briefly describe any anticipated effects on the surrounding area from
     construction or operation of the facility.   These effects might
     include, but are not limited to:  changes in residential or commercial
     development;  changes in land use; etc.

22.  Briefly describe any social or economic benefits expected to result
     from construction or operation of the facility.

23.  Are you aware of any significant public objections to construction or
     operation of the proposed facility?  If yes,  please describe these
     objections.
                                      2-6

-------
a careful site and feasibility study of the proposed facility location, and
that the applicant is reasonably aware of physical and social conditions in
the impact area.  However, most information is obtainable from sources other
than the applicant, if desired.  As a screening analysis intended to require
one day or less, we encourage the participation of the applicant in provid-
ing this information.

     Questions 1 through 4 are designed to provide background information
about the nature and location of the facility.  Questions 5 through 15 are
designed to determine whether there are any sensitive features which might
be affected by new residential growth in the impact area.  Questions 16
through 20 ask the respondent to estimate the direct and indirect employment
and housing effects of the facility, and Questions 21 through 23 require
that some thought be given to social or economic effects in the impact area,
as well as public attitudes toward the • facility.

     Your primary sources of information for these questions are:.

     •  the new source applicant

     •  those agencies listed in Questions 5 through 15.

Additional sources of information are:

     •  local economic development officials

     •  regional and local planning groups

     •  local chambers of commerce

     •  other sources listed throughout Chapters 2, 3, and 4.

Your reliance on these additional sources may add considerably £0 the time
and labor required to complete Level A.  Ideally, Level A should be a quick
screening process which relies primarily on the applicant to supply the
required information.  You may, however, use any other source of informa-
tion listed in this manual which you consider to be appropriate.

2.3  STEP 2:  APPLY LEVEL A DECISION CRITERIA

     In deciding whether to proceed to Level B or C, consider the following:

     •  the answer to Questions 18 and 19 will indicate whether
        population or new residential growth is expected from
        construction or operation of the facility.  Any new
        population or residential growth could endanger the
        sensitive areas listed in the set of questions, or
        could have uncertain social or economic effects and,
        therefore, a Level B or C analysis is appropriate.
                                         2-7

-------
      •  if you are aware  of significant public objections  to
         the facility,  a Level B  or C analysis  is  appropriate.

      •  if there  are other major facilities  or businesses
         locating  in the impact area —  whether related  to  the
         applicant's facility or  not —  a Level B  or C
         analysis  is appropriate.

      •  if construction or operation of the  facility is expected
         to result in changes in  land use,  such as the construction
         of major  road  facilities,  the conversion  of residential
         areas  to  commercial or industrial  use,  or the conversion
         of agricultural land to  other uses,  a  Level B or C analysis
         is appropriate.  At Levels  B or C  a  more  detailed  assessment
         of these  changes in land use can be  undertaken,  to consider
         the type,  location,  and  timing  of  these changes.   Factors
         that should be  considered  in deciding  whether to proceed
         with further analysis  include a)   the  nature and extent of
         the vacant  land subject  to  increased development pressure
         as a result of  the  new source,  b)  the  increases  in popula-
         tion or population  density  which may be induced, c) the
         nature of land  use  regulations  in  the  impact area  and the
        potential effects of these  regulations  on development and
         the environment.  If changes  in land use  are expected, and
         there is any uncertainty about  the significance  of these
         changes, a  Level B  or  C analysis is  appropriate.

If none of the above criteria  are satisfied, then we recommend a finding of
no significant impact  (FNSI).  There may, however, be significant primary
impacts resulting from the  facility which require further review by the usei
These primary impacts are not the concern of this manual, and nothing in
this manual is designed to assess them.   The information required to answer
the questions in Figure 3 is designed for screening secondary impacts only.

2.4  SUMMARY OF LEVEL A ANALYSIS

     •  Level A is the first level of analysis  of the potential
        secondary impacts  of the facility.

     •  the information required for Level  A is shown in the  form
        of the screening questions listed in Figure 3.

     •  do not use Figure  3 as a formal  standardized questionnaire.
        Rather, use these  screening questions as a summary  of
        information needed to screen secondary  impacts.   Depending
        upon the type of facility proposed  and  its geographic loca-
        tion,  you should select the information you will require  for
        screening the project.
                                           2-8

-------
the questions in Figure 3 are directed solely toward
secondary impacts.  Primary impacts are not considered
in this manual.
                                2-9

-------
                                 Chapter  3

                             LEVEL B  ANALYSIS
 3.1   INTRODUCTIN TO LEVEL B ANALYSIS

      Level B is designed primarily, to quantify the socioeconomic effects of
 the  facility, and comprises generally only a very limited consideration of
 secondary physical effects.  The quantification of socioeconomic effects
 is based on multipliers calculated  by the user, although we have provided
 default values for some steps.  Level B also requires input from local
 sources in the impact area, such as economic development officials and
 realtors.

      Figure 4 is a flow chart of the major steps in the Level B analysis.
 The principal output of this analysis is part of the assessment summary,*
 which supports a finding of no significnt impact, or which recommends a
 Level C (EIS) analysis of secondary impacts.

      The data required for Level B are readily available either from primary
 or published sources,** including the location study that the applicant may
 have^completed for site selection.  We recommend that the applicant be
 required to supply all applicable information, as the Level B methodology
presupposes that limited resources are available to the user at this stage
 of environmental review, i.e., prior to the preparation of an EIS.  However,
 independent verification of some of the information supplied by the applicant
or other sources is desirable, and is discussed in the context of individual
 steps below.

      If your resources allow you to expend more effort in tracking down data,
steps in Chapter 4 (Level C)  which correspond to those in Level B list addi-
tional sources.

     The results of Level B analysis,  incorporated into the assessment summary,
are directed to a community audience,  and emphasize socioeconomic effects.   At

*Known as  the environmental assessment in CEQ nomenclature.

**The recommended data sources are provided in the discussion of each step
in this chapter.
                                         3-1

-------
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
 Step  7
 Step 8
 Step 9
 Step 10
 Step 11
       FNSI
     Define the
     Impact Area
      Estimate
       Direct
     Employment
      Calculate
      Non-Local
     Employment
      Calculate
       Indirect
      Employment
    Calculate Direct
     and Indirect
   Population Effects
  Estimate the Number
   of New Households
  Review the Existing
    Housing Market
  Estimate the Number
    of New Housing
    Units Required
  Review Air, Water,
  and Sensitive Area
  Potential Impacts
                               4-
    Apply Level B
  Decision Criteria
                               I
Prepare an Assessment
      Summary
Level B
                            IEIS  I
            Figure 4.  Flowchart of Level B Activities
                                     3-2

-------
 an early stage in the environmental review process,  a Level B analysis
 provides an indication of the population and employment effects of the
 facility.  These effects are of obvious concern to interested parties in
 the impact area.

      In addition to these socioeconomic effects,  you are required to do a
 qualitative review of secondary air,  water,  and sensitive area (i.e.,
 physical)  impacts.   This analysis  of physical impacts does not rely on com-
 plex quantitative techniques.   If  the Level B criteria indicate that a
 Level c analysis is appropriate, then secondary impacts can be quantified
 and treated in considerable detail during the preparation of the EIS.

 3.2  NOTE TO EPA REGIONAL OFFICE USERS OF THIS MANUAL

      Data solicited from the applicant for Level  B can be solicited in a
 form which corresponds  to an environmental information document.

      Some regional  offices rely upon  an areawide  environmental assessment
 as  one  tool to measure  the potential  for secondary impacts,  particularly
 upon sensitive areas.   However, we recommend a Level B analysis in addition
 to  any  analysis based on the areawide assessment.

 3.3  STEP 1:   DEFINE THE IMPACT AREA

      To reduce the  effort required to collect the  data for Level  B,  define
 the impact area along county lines, rather than sub-county government juris-
 dictions,  as  is the case at  Level  C.   The  impact area at  Level B  specifically
 includes  the  county containing  the new source facility (the  'host county1),
 and any other counties  in the facility's  commutershed which  are expected to
 contribute to the facility's labor pool.
-------
 environment which may occur if direct employment requirements cannot be met
 from the local population in the impact area.

 3.5   STEP 3:  CALCULATE NONLOCAL EMPLOYMENT

      If the new source is expected to create E* new jobs,  as  estimated in
 the  previous step,  the local(D  labor force may supply some of this employ-
 ment.   The remaining increment in employment (E)  is:

         E s E* - Elocal

      Calculating the local component  requires  a consideration of

      •   levels of unemployment in the impact area

      •   skills required by the new source  relative  to  those
         available in the impact area

      •   wages  paid  by the new source  relative  to  prevailing
         wages.

 Ask  the^new source  applicant and local economic development officials  to  esti-
 mate this  local  component for that year within the  ten-year period  representing
 the  maximum direct  employment (E*)  of the  project (from Step  2).  Using the
 example  cited  in Table  1,  the year of maximum  direct employment is  1981.  Using
 the  local  component,  calculate the increment in employment  (E)  that must  be met
 by new workers moving into the impact area.  This represents  the maximum  incre-
 ment for the ten-year period of  analysis (E    ).
                                           IT13.2C
     In  using this  technique,  it is extremely  important that  you require  the
 applicant  and economic development officials to provide as much detail  as is
 available  concerning  the  existing communities  from which the  facility expects
 to draw both temporary  (construction)  and permanent  (operation) local workers.
 It is also very  important  that you distinguish, with the help of the applicant
 and  other officials,  the  temporary local workforce from the permanent local
workforce.  There are several  considerations involved:

     •   temporary workers  often  are more willing  to commute long
         distances to  a work  site than are permanent workers

     •   if a large  temporary workforce  is required — and this work-
         force cannot be  supplied locally, even  allowing for those who
         commute  long distances —  then  a major  influx of temporary
        workers  is  likely.  Resulting impacts will happen quickly,
        and  there will be  limited  time  for the  community to prepare
         for them.  After  a specified period of  time, temporary workers
        are  likely to leave the  area, leaving behind a small,  permanent
        workforce, the effects of which will be qualitatively different.
   "Local" refers to any of the counties in the impact area,
                                            3-4

-------


Year
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
SOURCE :
TABLE 1
PROJECT EMPLOYMENT
Warner Valley Station — Washington County Utah
Operating or Permanent
Construction Workforce
1 0
258 0
905 0
1016 °
812 108
146 112
0 108
0 108
0 108
0 108
Mountain West Research. Economic/Demographic Assessment Manual —
Current Practices, Procedural Recommendations, and a Test Case. Prepared
for Bureau of Reclamation, November 1977, Contract Number 07-DR-50180, p. 212.
3-5

-------
      As a quick check on the estimate of the local component  (E,    } , you
 do the following:                                              local' ' you

      (1)  obtain Current Population Survey Labor Force Estimates from
           the Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS)

      (2)  for the counties in the impact area, extract the data for
           total labor force, percent of labor force unemployed, and
           total unemployment

      (3)  although there is a one- to two-year long lag for these data,
           the estimate of total unemployment provides a rough estimate
           of the number of local individuals available to work at the
           new facility.

      As an additional check:

      (1)   ask the new source applicant or local economic development
           officials  for the current unemployment rate in the impact
           area
      (2)   apply this rate to the total labor force estimates from the
           BLS study, to obtain another rough estimate of the number
           of individuals available.

      You  should carry out Step 3 at  least twice:

      (1)   first for the year of maximum direct construction employment (E )

      (2)   second for the year of stable direct operating employment (E );
           this operations year must  fall within the ten-year period of0
           analysis.

There is  the possibility that the year of maximum total  direct  employment may be
a year other than those in which either maximum construction or stable operating
employment occurs.   This maximum total employment will be  the sum of construction
and operating employment for that year.   If  the employment profile for the pro-
ject  reflects this pattern,  then Step  3  should be carried  out a third time

      (3)   for the year  of maximum total  direct employment  (E );  this total
           employment will be  the sum of  construction and operations  for
           that year.  Usually, however,  E. will be  the same  as  either
           E   or E .                       K

 .    Ec and E0 wil1  represent the employment increment at peak  construction and
stable operations, respectively.  E ,  if  calculated, will represent  the employ-
ment increment at peak  (total) employment.  You should use these estimates to
carry out  steps 4, 5, 6,  8, and  9.  Each  of these steps should be repeated for
we peak construction, stable operations, 'and  (if different) , peak total employ-
                                          3-6

-------
 3.6  STEP 4:  CALCULATE INDIRECT EMPLOYMENT

      This step involves the calculation of a multiplier to account for the employ-
      in^-ront (E) of the facility.  This multiplier is applied to the employment
           (E) estimated in Step 3 above to derive total direct and indirect em-
 ployment (ET) attributable to the facility.

 Explanation of Procedure

      For any_ type of employment (T) ,  there is an associated population (P,  number
 of persons  per worker)  which is defined by the constant,  a,  where


                /T                                              (2)

 Furthermore,  non-basic  employment  (S,  defined below)  is  linked to population,


                /p                                             (3)

 The total direct  and  indirect  employment (ET)  impacts  of  the  facility  are:

         T?  s
         ET


 A more detailed derivation of  equation  (4) is  given in Appendix I.A.

     To  calculate  the ratios in  (2) and  (3) above, data on employment by major
 economic sector (Table 2) and  population are required.  Obtain these  data for
 the most recent year available, but in every case population and employment
 data should be for the same year.

     Population data are available from the Bureau of the Census, Current Popu-
 lation Reports, Series P-26, which is part of the Federal-State Cooperative
 Program for Population Estimates. A report is issued annually for each state
 and for counties within each state.

     Employment by the major sectors in Table 2 is available from the  Bureau
of Labor Statistics, Employment and Earnings,  States and Areas.  This  source
provides employment for each state and for 246 major labor areas.   If  at least
half of the impact area falls within a labor area, use the data for that labor
area to calculate  (3).  Otherwise,  use state data.

     Employment in agriculture is not available from the above source.  For this
sector,  two choices are possible:

     *   if 1978 population data are being used, consult the 1978
         Census of Agriculture.  Use the figure for farm operator's,
         plus farm labor hired for more than 150 days.  These data
         are available on a county level, and  can be aggregated to
         derive other geographic units.
                                    3-7

-------
                             TABLE 2

                      MAJOR ECONOMIC SECTORS
Agriculture,  forestry and fisheries
     Agriculture
     Forestry and fisheries
Mining
     Metal
     Coal
     Crude petroleum and natural gas
     Nonmetallic, except fuels

Manufacturing

     Food and kindred products
     Textile mill products
     Apparel and other fabric products
     Lumber products and furniture
     Paper and allied products
     Printing and publishing
     Chemicals and allied products
     Petroleum refining
     Primary metals
     Fabricated metals and ordnance
     Machinery, except electrical
     Electrical machinery and supplies
     Motor vehicles and equipment
     Transportation equipment, except motor vehicles
     Other manufacturing

Transportation, communications, and public utilities

Wholesale trade

Retail trade

Finance, insurance and real estate

Services

Government

     Federal government
     State government
     Local government
                              3-8

-------
     •   if the population figures are collected for a year other
         than 1978, use the 1974- or 1978 Census of Agriculture
         and interpolate the data for intervening years.

     The Census does not include employment in forestry and fisheries. If this
is a significant portion of the local economy, consult the State Division of
Employment Security or Department of Commerce to derive employment in these
sectors.  To determine whether forestry and fisheries employment is a significant
portion of the local economy, consult County Business Patterns, an annual publica-
tion of the Census Bureau.  This report lists first quarter and annual payroll,
and number of establishments by industry in each state, and these data can be
used as a rough guide to the relative role of forestry and fishery activity in
the state economy.

     The calculation of the multiplier is dependent on the concept of basic versus
non-basic industries.

          "The reason for the existence'and growth of a region —
          whether it is a community or a small resource area at one
          extreme or a huge metropolitan or resource region at the
          other extreme — lies in the goods and services it pro-
          duces locally but sells beyond its borders.  These "basic"
          activities not only provide the means of payment for raw
          materials, food, and manufactured products which the region
          cannot produce itself, but also support the service activi-
          ties, which are principally local in productive scope and
          market areas."*

Basic industries are, therefore, those the production or output of which supplies
a demand which is generated outside of the region, whereas a non-basic industry
satisfies a demand generated within the region,

     Practically speaking, however, deciding whe'ther employment in an economic
sector is basic or non-basic is difficult.  As a rule-of-thumb, the employment
in the following industries is always considered basic:

     •   agriculture, forestry, and fisheries

     •   mining

and employment in these sectors is always non-basic:

     •   construction

     •   transportation, communications and public utilities

     •   retail trade

     •   services
*Isard, Walter.  Methods of Regional Analysis;  An Introduction to Regional
Science.  The MIT Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1960,
                                        3-9

-------
     •  local government

     •  finance, insurance, and real estate.

Employment in the four remaining sectors may be either basic or non-basic:

     •  manufacturing

     •  wholesale trade

     •  Federal government

     •  State government.

The method for determining the basic or non-basic nature of these sectors is a
location quotient.  This is explained in Table 3, which provides a sample calcu-
lation for Steps 4 and 5.

     After the allocation of employment to basic and non-basic components is
completed, non-basic employment (S) is divided by population (P, equation (3)),
and total direct and indirect employment (E )  is calculated (Equation (4)).

     Consult Figure 5 for a detailed example of this procedure.

3.7  STEP 5:  CALCULATE DIRECT AND INDIRECT POPULATION EFFECTS

     This step relies upon equations (2) and (3) to derive the total population
impact attributable to both the direct and indirect employment (ET) caused by
the new source.  This population effect (P_) is defined:
              :   otE  _   _
          PT =  I^B" " " ET                                      (5)

Appendix I.A provides more detail concerning this equation.  Figure 5 provides
an example of its application.

3.8  STEP 6:  ESTIMATE THE NUMBER OF NEW HOUSEHOLDS

     To calculate the number of housing units necessary to accommodate the new
population  (P )  in the impact area, estimate the number of households implied by
this population.  The simplest method is to use a coefficient of average house-
hold size (H  ), to calculate the number of households (HH),


         HH =PT/H                                                  (to
                Hav                                                (5)

Since 1950, average household size nationally has declined steadily from 3,37
to 2.86 in  1977.*  A coefficient of 2.85 to 2.95 is a reasonable default value.
*U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census.  Statistical Abstract of
the United States, 1978, p. 43.
                                        3-10

-------
     This example utilizes Albany-Schnectady-Troy, under the assumption that'
a major portion of the impact area falls within this major labor area.  The
1978 data are used.   Table 3 details the data required to calculate the ratios
in equations (2) and (3) of this chapter.  The columns show the following:

     (1) 1978 employment (in thousands) by sector in Albany-
         Schnectady- Troy,

     (2) the ratio of this employment to total employment in
         AIbany-Schnectady-Troy,

     (3) 1978 employment (in thousands) by sector in New York
         State,

     (4) the ratio of this employment to total employment in
         New York State,

     (5) the location quotient, which represents column (2)
         divided by column (4),

     (6) and (7) the employment in column (1) is allocated  to one
         of these two columns, depending on whether the employment
         is basic or non-basic.  In Section 3.6 we stated that some
         sectors are always basic or non-basic, and there is therefore
         no need for a location quotient to make this decision.  These
         sectors are denoted as "B" or  "NB" on Table 3.  Columns  (2),
         (4), and (5) therefore read N/A for these sectors.  For all
         other sectors, a location quotient must be calculated.  These
         sectors are denoted as "mixed" on Table 3.

     To calculate this quotient, you must compare employment in the region most
closely approximating the impact area  (R&) to either state or national employ--
ment data (R%).  RB will be based on state data if R& is either a major labor
area, an SMSA, or an aggregation of county or community data.  At Level B,
RA m
-------
is producing in excess of local needs and -Is satisifying a demand external to
the region.  Conversely, if the ratio is 1.0 or less, the industry is producing
at or less than local requirements, may lie a net importer, and is in any case
responding only to internally-generated demand.

     It should be noted that "other manufacturing" includes all manufacturing
not specifically included in the remaining manufacturing categories, including:

     9  stone, clay, and glass products

     0  instrwnents and related products

     0  rubber and miscellaneous plastics products

     0  leather and leather products

     0  miscellaneous manufacturing industries.

     As illustrated in Table S3 employment data are not always available for
each of the second-level sectors in manufacturing.  This is particularly true
for major labor areas, few of which are expected to have employment in all
economic sectors.   You must be aware, then, that the data may be more aggregate
than shown in the table.

     The following is a step-by-step calculation of total direct and indirect
employment and population attributable to the new source.

     (I)   The peak employment of the new source (E*) is expected to be
           90 construction and 10 operation workers.  Of this requirement,
           all but- 50 workers will be supplied locally (Elocal)•  There-
           fore, the employment increment (E),

                E = E* = Etoaat

                is SO persons.

     (2)   The population (P) of Albany-Schnectady-Troy as of July 1, 1978
           was 792,300.  Total employment (T) in all sectors in 1978 was
           331 j900.   Therefore, the population-employment ratio (<*).

                    P_ _ 792,200
                    •T ~ 331,900

                  is 2.39.

     (3)  , Based on the analysis in Table 3, non-basic employment (S) in
           Albany-Schnectady-Troy in 1978 was 228,600.  Population (P) was
           792,300.   Therefore,

                      S  m  228,600 m
                  B   P     792,300   '29
                                          3-12

-------
(4)  The total direct and indirect employment impacts By,

            F  __£	        50
            *T ~ 2 . ag  -  i-(2.39 x .29)

     are 162 persons* and the implicit employment multiplier is
     162/50 = 3.24*.

(5)  The total direct and indirect population impacts (Py),

            PT  =    ~E   = «BT= 2.39 x 162
                   1 . ccg

            is 387 persons.

     Repeat this analysis for the year of stable operating workforce,
     i.e.,  after construction is completed.  Also repeat this analysis
     for the year of maximum total direct employment, if it is different
     from either of the two years already considered.
*There are projects which have a large and extremely short-term peak
construction employment relative to the stable operations workforce.
In these cases, the calculated employment multiplier may overstate the
short-term effects, because economic activity will not expand to the
degree that the multiplier indicates for such a short-term peak.  The
implicit multiplier should, therefore, be scaled down to account for
the short-term nature of this peak.  In boomtown situations, the
implicit multiplier typically will range from 1.2 to l.S, and this is
a reasonable default value range for projects that meet the types of
conditions described above.
                                    3-13

-------
                        Table  3




CALCULATION OF EMPLOYMENT MULTIPLIER FOR ALBANY*aCHENECTADY-TROY, 1.978
Albany-Schenectady-
Hew York State
Troy


i .Vjriculc'-r*, forestry
i M.i.-.ir.g
j Cifiscruccisr.
1
| Manufacturing


and risheries (3)
(B)
(MB)
(Mixed)

(1)
1.3
0.2
10.7


. (2)
N/A
N/A
:VA


(3)
43.9
6.3
197.5


(4)
H/A
N/A
N/A

Location AlbanY-Schsnectddv-
guotient Troy
Basic Non-Basic
(5) (6) (7)
N/A 1,3
a/A 0 . 2
N/A 10.7

feed i Sir-dred Products
Textile Mill Products
Apparel i Other Fabric Products
luzber Products & Furniture
Pacer S Allied Products
Printiac s Publishing
Chenical* S Allied Products
Secrslev.- Refining
?rLjiary Metals ~~

Fabricated Metals S Ordinances _
Maci-.i.-.ery, except Electrical —
Electrical Machinery S Supplies
Mocsr Vehicles 6 Equipment
Trira-jcrsacion Squipa««t, except Motor
Venisles —
Other Manufacturing
Trir.scortation, Communications and
Public Utilities (NB)
Ai:cle«ale Trade (Mixed)
.detail Trade 
-------
          Some observers have argued that construction workers typically do not bring
     their families with them to the impact area, that they typically head households
     smaller than the average cited above, or that they are disproportionately single
     relative to the general population.  In addition, some studies suggest that
     construction workers are willing to commute much further than other workers, in
     order to avoid the necessity to either leave or move their families.  The evi-
     dence is sufficiently contradictory; it is reasonable to state that 200 to 300
     people will accompany every 100 construction workers who move into the impact
     area.*   This ratio is consistent with the average household size assumption
     above, and is also consistent with the population-employment ratio in equation
     (5).

3.9  STEP  7:   REVIEW THE EXISTING HOUSING MARKET

          Consider all of the counties in the impact area as a single housing market.
     If there are vacant units in this market (either owner or rental), the new house-
     holds (HH, derived from PT) will be allocated to them.

          Because of a lack of generalizable data concerning housing preferences, no
     rules-of-thumb are available to allocate the incoming population to housing of
     specific characteristics.  It is assumed that housing preferences are adaptable
     in the short-term, i.e., that the incoming population will settle in the avail-
     able  existing housing to the extent possible,

          Identifying the number of vacant housing units by county in the impact area
     is a  difficult task,  if the procedures are to be consistent with the limited
     resources allotted to Level B,   The following steps are required:

          a)    Analyze the number and composition of housing units in the
               impact area using the most recent U.S.  Census of Housing.
               A volume entitled "General Housing Characteristics" is avail-
               able for each state.   Each volume provides data for counties,
               and for places of 1,000 inhabitants or more.

               •  For counties,  extract the information on "total housing
                  units",  and "vacant for sale only or for rent."  No data
                  on composition of these units are provided (i.e, single-
                  family,  etc.).

               •  For places of 1,000 to 2,499 inhabitants,  extract the
                  same information as for counties.   Again,  housing com-
                  position is not given,

               •  For places of 2,500 or more inhabitants, extract the
                  data for "all year-round housing units", "vacant year-
                  round units",  and "units in structure."  Table 4 shows
                  the 1970 data for Batavia,  New York.   Note that the
                  data cover the composition of the housing  stock (single-
                  family,  multi-family,  mobile home or trailer)  with the
                  exception of group quarters.
     *See  Appendix  I.C  for a  brief  summary  of  construction worker case  studies
                                              3-15

-------
                                   TABLE 4

          EXTRACT FROM 1970 CENSUS OF HOUSING FOR BATAVI A, NEW YORK
SOURCE:  U.S. Bureau of the Census.   Census of Housing;   1970,  "General
         Housing Characteristics",  Final Report (HC(H-A34>  New York.


All year-round housing units
Vacant year-round units
Units in structure
All year-round units
1
2 or more
Mobile home or trailer
Owner-occupied
1
2 or more
Mobile home or trailer
Renter-occupied
1
2 or more
Mobile home or trailer

Number
5,867
197

5,867
3,584
2,280
3
3,717
3,179
536
2
1,953
351
1,601
1
                                    3-16

-------
           Although the Census information may be quite old, use it to
           provide an initial estimate of the amount and type of avail-
           able housing in the impact area.  In areas of high growth,
           these figures at least provide a base from which current •
           housing can be estimated.

           The vacancy information provided by the Census in the above
           source,  although not current,  provides an indication of the
           number of  vacant units that might be available relative to
           the total  number of available  housing units„

           Precise  local vacancy data are not readily available.  Na-
           tionally,  recent vacancies in  year-round units (for rent
           and for  sale)  have  averaged around 2.5  percent.*   This  may
           translate  to  a significant number of units depending on
           the available housing stock, e.g.,  in an area of  100,000
           units, 250 will  be  vacant  at this rate.

           Although some of these units may  be  substandard and pre-
           sumably unsuitable  for year-round habitation  by the in-
           coming population,  it is appropriate  to  assume that,  in
          periods of high  demand for housing,  a vacancy rate  of
           virtually zero is achievable.  There  is  no compelling
          evidence in the  literature to document a  'structural va-
          cancy rate1,  i.e., a level of vacancy which cannot  be
          overcome no matter how high the demand for housing.

          Practically speaking, vacancy rates vary significantly
          by locality.  The 1970 data for New York show that va-
          cancies range from 3.1 percent inside SMSAs to 8.8 per-
          cent outside, and from 3.0 percent in urban areas to 9.2
          percent in rural areas, and that they show a similar
          range for individual places in the state.   Therefore, a
          local estimate of housing vacancy rates is essential.

      b)   Contact three  to five realtors  serving the counties  in the
          impact area.   These  realtors may be identified by  community
          using the National Roster of Realtors,**  a standard  reference
          publication.   These  realtors may also be  identified  through
          the  local economic development  board  or  the local  chamber of
          commerce.

          Provide these  realtors with the  number of households
          represented by the incoming population that corresponds  to
          the  maximum  direct and indirect  employment  of  the  new
          source (HH,  from Step 6). Ask these realtors if this
          number of vacant  units is currently available  in the
          realtor's community or in surrounding communities within
          the  impact area.

         As a  check against the estimate of housing adequacy, ask
          for a current housing vacancy rate  (rental vs. owner, if
         available).   Apply this rate to the number of housing units
         from Step 7a to derive a rough estimate of the number of
*U.S. Bureau of the Census.   Current Housing Reports,  Series H-lll.

**Stan Mats Communications,  Inc.   427 Sixth Avenue,  S.E.,  Cedar Rapids,  Iowa
(319) 364-6032.                        3_17

-------
               vacant units.

               Particularly for large projects, the applicant's site
               selection study may contain a recent analysis of the
               housing market, including a current estimate of the
               number of vacant available units.

3.10  STEP 8:  ESTIMATE THE NUMBER OF NEW HOUSING UNITS REQUIRED

           Discussions with realtors will indicate either that sufficient vacancies
      currently exist to accommodate the new households,  or that a housing shortfall
      is probable.  If the realtor indicates that insufficient units are available,
      ask for an estimate of  the number of available units, from which the shortfall
      can be deduced.  Similarly,  having derived the number of vacant units using
      vacancy rate information, another estimate of the shortfall can be derived.

           The difference between the number of new households (from Step 6)  and the
      number of vacant units  (from Step 7)  represents the number of new units required
      for the incoming population.  Regardless of whether there are already plans to
      construct this housing,  and regardless of recent trends in new construction, the
      fact that these units do not currently exist is a sign of potentially significant
      housing and infrastructure problems in the impact area, as well as secondary
      physical impacts resulting from this new growth.

3.11  STEP 9:  REVIEW SELECTED PHYSICAL IMPACTS

           It is desirable to  evaluate secondary physical impacts at Level B, without
      resorting to the quantification of these impacts required for the preparation
      of an EIS (Level C,  Chapter 4).  This step concentrates particularly on air,
      water, and sensitive area impacts,  and comprises a qualitative assessment of
      these issues,

      Sensitive Areas

           At Level A, you will have asked specific questions of the applicant (see
      Figure 3)  in order to identify sensitive areas in the impact area.  Review the
      answers to these questions,  and use these answers as the basis for a rough
      estimate of the percentage of  the total acreage in  the impact area which is
      represented by sensitive lands.  Determine whether  there has been recent develop-
      ment in sensitive areas,  and also whether there are  any controls over this type
      of development.  The best source for this information is the local planning
      board or a regional  planning group.   You may obtain  a recent land use map of
      the impact area — the contents of these maps  and probable sources for these
      maps are discussed in Section  4,15,  Level C.

      Air and Water  .

           You should obtain the relevant State Implementation Plan (SIP)  and 208 Plan for
      the impact area, and review  them for information concerning the current air
      and water quality situation, e.g.,  location of major receiving waters,  trends
      in air and water quality in  recent  years,  pressures  on air and water quality
      due to recent  development activity,  etc.   The  source for these reports  is the
                                           3-18

-------
      areawide water quality management agency, and the state air pollution control
      board or department of environmental affairs.

           Some local jurisdictions produce their own SIPs or water quality management
      plans.  Consult the local or regional planning agency.

           If you obtain a local land use map to identify and analyze sensitive areas,
      use it also to identify areas where the water quality may be affected by secon-
      dary development.

           You should relate any potential secondary effects of the project — as
      identified in the previous steps of Level B — to the primary effects of the
      project, as well as to the current air and water quality situation.  For example,
      significant secondary growth in a nonattainment area will negatively affect
      efforts to achieve compliance with air quality standards.  Similarly, whereas
      the primary air and water effects of a facility may be obvious and steps may
      be undertaken to deal with them, the secondary effects may have received
      no consideration,  and may be unmanageable without additional mitigation measures.

           You must never permit or otherwise give approval to any facility if the
      facility does not conform to the State Implementation Plan (SIP)  that applies
      to the impact area.*  The Level B qualitative analysis of air impacts may not
      be sufficient to determine this conformity,  in which case  you should go to
      Level C for further analysis of the air quality impacts of the facility,


3.12  STEP 10:   APPLY LEVEL B DECISION CRITERIA

           1)   If no new housing units are required in the impact counties,  assume
      that additional infrastructure will not be required, that commercial development
      will be quite limited,  and that secondary physical impacts will not occur.
      The recommended decision  under these circumstances is a finding of no significant
      (secondary)  impact (FNSI),

           2)   If,  however,  new housing units  are  required to house  new  households
      associated  directly or  indirectly with  the new source,  you must make a determin-
      ation about  the implications  of this growth.   We  suggest the following rule-of-
      thumb:

               If  the number of  new housing units  represents  at least
               a  5  percent increase  in the number  of housing  units  in
               the  impact area,  preparation of  an  EIS  is  highly
               recommended.  In  this context, new  housing units include
               conversion of quarters  not previously offered  as habitable
               to the civilian population.  This recommendation is based
               on the potential  for  infrastructure  overcrowding, as well
               as the potential  for  secondary physical  impacts  arising
               from mobile and stationary source emissions, the pressure
               on sensitive areas  from the land requirements of residen-
               tial growth, and other effects discussed fully in Chapter
               4.   Regardless of the size or characteristics of the impact
               area, a five percent  increase in the housing unit base is
               substantial.
      *Clean Air Act, s. 176(c).

                                             3-19

-------
           3)   If there is new housing growth expected which represents less than 5%
      of the existing base and

               •  there are sensitive areas adjacent to or within the site

               •  some of these sensitive areas have been or are soon to be
                  developed

               •  there are few or no controls over sensitive area develop-
                  ment,

      go to level C.

           4)   If there is new housing growth expected which is less than 5% of the
      existing base,  and if there are otHer known major facilities or businesses lo-
      cating in the impact area, go to Level C.  Consult the applicant and local eco-
      nomic development officials to determine if other major facilities are known to
      be moving into the area.

           5)   If there are significant public objections to the facility, and if any
      new housing growth is expected, go to Level C.

           6)   If there is new housing growth expected which is less than 5% of the
      existing base,  and  the impact area is nonattainment or in close proximity to a
      Class I area, go to Level C.

      Be cautious in applying the last four criteria.   You should not,  for example,
      go to Level C if only five or ten units are to be constructed (provided this is
      less than a 5% cutoff), given the probable error associated with the estimate
      of new housing.  In most cases, the magnitude of new housing — in those cases
      where it is required — will be so great that preparation of an EIS is an
      obvious step.

3.13  STEP 10:  PPEPARE AN ASSESSMENT SUMMARY

           The principal output of Level B is a short paper* which quantifies the
      socioeconomic impacts of the project and which contains either a recommendation
      for a Level C analysis (an EIS) or a finding of no significant impact.

           Specifically, this paper should include:

           •  an estimate of the direct construction and operating employ-
              ment of the facility for the first ten years (Step 2).


           •  an estimate of the maximum direct employment (E*) of the pro-
              ject during peak construction, peak operations within the ten-
              year period of analysis, and (if different), peak total
              employment within the ten-year period of analysis (Step 2).
      *ln the EPA Regional Office, this short paper would correspond to part of the
       environmental assessment.
                                              3-20

-------
      •  an estimate  of the portion  of  this  maximum direct employment that
         will  be  supplied locally  (Elqcal, Step  3)

      •  an estimate  of the net employment increment (E)  during these periods
         of maximum direct employment  (Step  3)

     •   an estimate of  the indirect and induced employment  (E  , Step  4)
         and population  (P , Step 5)  attributable to the  employment
         increment  (E)

     •   an estimate of  the number of households (HH) represented by
         this new population (Step 6)

     •   an estimate of  the number of new housing units,  if  any, re-
         quired in the impact area to accommodate these households
         (Steps 7 and 8)

     •   an identification of potential dangers to  sensitive areas,
         and air and water quality, posed by any new housing units,
         or associated infrastructure (Step 9).

     In  general, physical impacts receive a limited consideration in  Level B,
because  of the difficulty of devising simple, yet  accurate, techniques which
require  limited time and labor.

     We  recommend that  the Level B paper (the assessment summary for  secondary
impacts) be no longer than one to three pages, and that  it be incorporated as
part of  the environmental assessment.  Level B should take no longer  than two
to three days total.   An example of an assessment  summary for a hypothetical
project  is provided in Figure 6.
                                           3-21

-------
                                 Figure S


           EXAMPLE OF AN ASSESSMENT SUMMARY FOR SECONDARY IMPACTS*

         (The following discussion represents  a hypothetical case)

      The impact area of the proposed project  is Quillwn County;   the county
 is geographically large enough (several thousand square miles)  that the
 majority of construction and  operating workers  can  be  expected to  have
 permanent or temporary residences in the county.   The greatest  distance
 from any point  in the county  to the project is approximately 75 miles.

      Peak employment will be  2,275 workers for eight to ten months  during
 the three-year  construction phase.   The stable operating workforce  will be
 about 300.

      It  is estimated that about 800 of the peak employment  workforce will
 come from Quillum County.  This estimate is consistent  with the  high unem-
 ployment rate in the county,  and the relatively low  skill level  required to
 perform  many  of the  jobs.

      Of  the 300 workers required for operations,  about  200  will  be  local
 workers;  100  workers who possess skills not.available locally will  come in
 from outside  Quillum County.

      Total direct and indirect  employment attributable  to peak  construction
 will be  about 2,275.   Total net and indirect  employment attributable to
 long-term operations at the project will  range from  ISO to  280;   this esti-
 mate points up  the considerable discrepancy between  short and long-term
 effects  of the  project.

      The  number of  new households^  short-term will be about 1,500,  and  long-
 term about 100  to 200.   Based on information  concerning housing  availability,
 there are  sufficient units to accommodate the  number  of  new  households attri-
 butable  to  the  long-term effects  of the project.  There is,  however,  a
 severe deficiency  of housing^ for  the new  households  associated with the  short-
 term construction peak.   This deficiency ranges from 1,250  to 1,300 units,
 equivalent  to about  9%  of the current housing  stock  in  the  county.

 Sensitive Areas

      The existing wetlands,  historic landmarks, wildlife refuges, and parks
 in the impact area will not be affected by  secondary housing or  commercial
growth.  However,  the site of the project, and the possible sites of resi-
dential and cormercial growth,  lie entirely within a coastal zone.  There is
potential for significant and unpredictable effects from primary and  secon-
dary  activities associated with the project.  Despite the controls nominally
provided by the State's CZM plan, the project is a substantial operation
which may permanently alter the charac isr of the zone.
*In preparing the assessment summary, you should emphasize the results from
 each step of the analysis, rather than detailing the specific calculations.
                                      3-22

-------
 Air Quality

      The  proposed site  and the  entire  impact area  is a class II area.  There
 are two Class  I areas within  ten miles of the site.  The air quality effects
 of secondary residential and  commercial growth, particularly for mobile
 sources,  will  be measurable in  the short-term, but long-term residential and
 commercial growth should have a minimal effect on  air quality.

 Water Quality

      There are not expected to  be any  significant  secondary impacts on fresh-
 water resources.   All areas where primary  and secondary activity would take
 place are within a defined coastal zone.   This area consists of numerous is-
 lands, salt marshes, bogs,  and  other marine features, and it supports a
 diversity of habitats.  There are commercially important communities of
 shellfish and  finfish,  as  well  as species  of aquatic mammals, including por-
 poises and great whales.   The coastline and communities are important areas
 for marine birds.  In large part, the  success of these species  is attribut-
 able  to the minimal human  presence in  the  area.

      The  potential primary effects of  the  project  on the coastal zone are
 far more  significant than  either the short-term or long-term effects of
 residential or other secondary  growth.  However, any residential growth in
 a coastal zone  such as  this one—which has a limited amount of  current de-
 velopment—can  have measurable  deleterious effects  and should be carefully
 evaluated.  Although the town plans to revise its  comprehensive land use plan
 to  account for  the potential  effects of the project, we recommend more ana-
 lysis  of  the project's  secondary effects.

 Conclusion

      1)   During  the peak construction phase, there  is a projected deficiency
 of  1,250  to 1,300 housing units, representing about 9% of the total housing
 base in Quillum  County.   Although the company plans to bring in temporary
 housing,  the potential  effects of this deficiency require a Level C analysis.
 This deficiency may result  in serious infrastructure overcrowding,  secondary
physical  impacts from mobile homes,  and stationary source emissions, pressure
 on  sensitive areas, and other effects.

     2)  The facility site and  the probable site of most secondary growth are
 in  the coastal zone.   The possible impingement of this secondary growth on
 sensitive coastal areas, combined with the potential primary effects of con-
 struction and operation, requires a Level C analysis.
                                    3-23

-------
                                   CHAPTER 4

                               LEVEL C ANALYSIS
4.1  INTRODUCTION TO LEVEL C ANALYSIS

     The principal output of Level C is that portion of an environmental impact
statement that considers secondary impacts.  Only secondary impacts are covered
by the techniques in this chapter.  The prospective users of these Level C tech-
niques are the environmental impact statement preparation staffs at EPA regional
offices, agencies of state and local government concerned with environmental re-
view, regional planning commissions, contractors hired by these organizations,
and others interested in the secondary impacts of any facility.  This manual
should also be provided to any interested applicant whose facility is subject to
environmental review.

     It is helpful to refer to Figure 7 while using this Chapter.  Figure 7
shows the causal mechanisms for and interrelationships between secondary impacts.
An explanation of this flow chart is provided in Appendix I.J.

     Although this user manual emphasizes the analysis of the secondary impacts
of a project—from the initial receipt of the application to the preparation of
an EIS~this should not be construed as an implicit statement that these impacts
are more important than primary impacts.  The purpose of the scoping meeting is
to determine which issues and impacts are to be addressed in the EIS—these may
or may not include secondary impacts.

     The Council on Environmental Quality has issued "Regulations for Implement-
ing the Procedural Provisions of NEPA."*  One provision of these regulations
states the following:

     There shall be an early and open process for determining the scope
     of issues to be addressed (in an EIS) and for identifying the sig-
     nificant issues related to a proposed action.  This process shall
     be termed scoping.**
* 40 CFR 1500 to 1508 > effective July 30, 1979.
**40 CFR 1501.7
                                          4-1

-------
                         1.
                                Nev Source
                                  Direct
                                                      BLOCK li  INOIRBTT INDUSTRIAL EMPLOTMEHT EFFECTS
                                                                                                    iS.
                                                                          1).
                                                 12.
                                                          Indirect
                                                                          14.
TlOUltl .
                                                                                                    j
S.
Cioqcnous



Cxo9«nou(
rectors

»
sic*
J*3Ui.t«JMEBtI :

I.



4.



6.

£1] CM
w


teildM
ClXM
' 1

Difac«re
Jtequlr

-«! 'Bopu
»


JVti*l
th


ceecut*;S
«••«*« SJ

Ul
\








-Mm



16.



17.

CIMB9
-
— j.
1
te*r
,'.>•: ta<>lc
;l;SfS*w


» . .
: toy:v:::*:-.:.::K
            BLOCK Ci   SERVICE
                      EMPLOYMENT
                      EFFECTS




Air





a.



•

w*t«r

».





Nci»«

10.




p»«ti-
cidti
                                                                                                       11.
                                                                                                            1
                           • »ocl»l. •cononic;  and r«iourc»-r»Ut*J li»p«ct «r«»«i  Tti«*« »r« generally  of
                             priiury concern  to ea»»m>4tt«i *IM| it«t«i,
                                         7.   SSCONMRY IMPACTS  ASSESSMENT
                                                            4-2

-------
If the scoping process does determine that secondary impacts should be considered,
the techniques in this chapter can be used to assess them.

4.2  FORMAT OF CHAPTER 4

     The remainder of this chapter discusses in detail the individual techniques
for assessing secondary impacts at a level of detail suitable for an environ-
mental impact statement.  The ultimate goal of these techniques is not necessa-
rily the quantification of impacts.  For some categories of impacts, either the
state-of-the-art does not allow credible quantification of these impacts, or a
qualitative analysis of the magnitude of and mitigation of these impacts is more
appropriate.

     Most of the blocks in Figure 7 are discussed below.  In addition, there is
a discussion of other steps required at Level C:

     •  defining the impact area

     •  describing the existing environment in the impact area

     •  doing a baseline projection of the impact area without the project.

     The order of exposition followed in this chapter represents a logical pro-
gression of steps corresponding to the order in which the analysis should be
undertaken.  A flow chart of the Level C techniques is given in Figure 8.

     For each assessment technique discussed below—starting with Section 4.4—
there is generally

     •  a description of the step or area of analysis

     •  the data output from the analysis

     «  the data input to  the  analysis, and the sources  for these data

     •  suggested techniques for the 'analysis.  Several  techniques may
        be  listed, and examples will often illustrate the use of  the
        technique.

     Although techniques are discussed in this manual in a  step-by-step  procedu-
ral  format, we assume that there will be significant initiative  taken by you to
supplement  or adapt  these  techniques  to local conditions, and  to  properly  inter-
pret the projections.  We  are  confident that the  techniques outlined  are suffi-
ciently accurate and straightforward, but there is  no substitute  for  imaginative
 adaptation of these techniques.

4.3  STEP 1:  DEFINE THE IMPACT AREA

     The impact  area comprises all communities within the normal  daily  commuting
radius  of the site where  the  facility will be constructed.   There is  potential
for  new residential  development in these  communities, as new individuals may be
attracted to  the commutershed  to work at  the  facility.   All other things being
equal,  the  closer a  community  is  to the facility, the greater  the degree of the
                                       4-3

-------
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
     Define the
    Impact Area
   Describe the
     Existing
   Environment
     Baseline
    Projection"
     Estimate
      Direct
    Employment
     Calculate
     Non-local
     Employment
     Calculate
     Indirect
     Employment
     Calculate -
 Direct s Indirect
Population Effects
   Estimate the
  Number of New
    Households
    Review the
     Existing
   Housing Market
Step 10
   Estimate New
   Housing Units
     Required
Step 11
   Allocate New
     Hnits to
   Communities
Step 12
     Calculate
    Residential
  Site Requirements
             Allocate
           Units  Within
           Communities
                 Step 13
                                                           Estimate New
                                                         Residential  Infra-
                                                         Structure Demands
                                                                       Step 14
                                                         Estimate  Service
                                                            Sector  Site
                                                           Requirements
                                                                      Step 15
 Stormwater
   Runoff
   Impacts
                                      Stea  16
                                          Ste-
                                                               Noise
                                                              Impacts
       17
                                                                       r™
          Pesticide
           Impacts
Step 18   Stej
      Sensitive
         Area
        Impacts
19
Step
20
                                                               Identify
                                                                Known
                                                              Colocator
                                                                      Step 21
                                      Step 22
    Calculate
 Known Colocator
Site fiequirements
                                                            Step
                                                             23
                Calculate
             Known Colocator
             Infrastructure
              Requirements
                                                                 _L
              Prepare
           Environmental
              Impact
             Statement
                                                                              Step 24
                                              Figure 8.  Flowchart of Level C Activities.
                                                  4-4

-------
expected impact.  Determine the normal commuting area by talking with:

    •   the local Chamber of Commerce

    •   the local economic development agency

    •   the permit applicant, who may have studied the issue
        prior to selecting the site for the facility

    •   the local division of employment security or department
        of labor.

    You may also define the  commuting area by referring to national data on
distance to work (Table 5)  and travel time to work  (Table 6).  The information
given in these tables, for all workers and by means of transportation,  indicates
that two-thirds of all workers travel fewer than ten miles, and fewer than 25
minutes, to get to work.  Information on travel to work is also collected for
the sixty SMSAs which comprise the sample for the Annual Housing Survey, and
you should review these data for facilities which are expected to locate within
these SMSAs.

    Regardless of the source used to estimate the commuting radius, the result-
ing impact area should be defined to include only those communities that can
reasonably be expected to contribute to the facility's labor pool.  Careful
definition of the impact area at the beginning of the analysis can reduce the
data collection burden considerably by reducing the number of jurisdictions
for which data are to be collected.

    There may not be a congruence between the impact area as defined above
(i.e., all communities within the facility's commutershed) and the data collec-
tion area  (i.e., all jurisdictions for which data are available).  Although we
suggest below for certain techniques that data be collected for individual
communities, practically speaking  you may have to  rely on data for larger
regional groupings, such as  counties, Bureau of Economic Analysis Areas  (BEAs),
or standard metropolitan statistical areas  (SMSAs).  The use of these different
groupings requires judgment  on your part to adapt the data as required to re-
flect local conditions.

4.4  STEP 2:  DESCRIBE THE EXISTING ENVIRONMENT IN  THE  IMPACT AREA

Description

    The description of the existing environment and the baseline projection
(next section) together provide both you and the readers of the EIS a summary
overview of economic and demographic conditions in  the impact area, and a con-
text for evaluating the effects of the facility.  The description of the exist-
ing environment utilizes data at the community level if available; otherwise,
county-level data are incorporated.  Concentrate on economic and demographic
conditions in preparing the  description of the existing environment.

Data Output/Sources

    A)  Employment by Major  Sector or 2-Digit SIC.
                                        4-5

-------
                                                           TABLE 5.

                                         MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION BY DISTANCE TO WORK
           (For the United  States:   1975.   Workers  14  years  old  and over)
Means of
Transportation
to Hoik
All workers
Automobile or truck
Drive alone
Car pool
Public transportation
Bus or streetcar
Subway or elevated
Railroad
Taxicab
Bicycle
Motorcycle
Walk only
Other means
Total1
(thousands)
70,8)6
61,657
47,188
14,470
4,587
2,958
1,124
387
118
432
285
3,645
210
Percentage distribution by distance to work (miles)
Total
100.0
100.0
100.0
100,0
1OO.O
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
Less than
1 mile
12.3
8.1
8.7
6.0
2.8
3.1
I. 3
-
18.6
41.4
11.2
91.4
27.1
I to 2
miles
16.0
16.3
16.9
14.4
14.3
18.0
5.6
2.1
45.8
43.1
19.3
8.3
31.4
3 to 4
miles
17.2
17.9
18.8
15.0
21.3
26.1
15.8
0.8
22.0
10.0
17.2
0.2
8.1
5 to 9
miles
21,6
22.9
23.5
20.7
24.1
25.7
28.2
3.9
11.0
4.2
19.3
0.1
19.0
10 to 14
miles
13.5
14,1
13.8
15.0
16.9
15.2
26.0
8.3
3.4
1.6
15.8
-
10.0
15 to 24
miles
12,3
13.1
12.1
16.0
13.5
8.7
18,7
39,8
-
-
12.6
-
3,8
25 miles
or more
7.1
7.6
6.0
12.8
7.0
3.3
4.2
45.7
-
-
4.6
-
-
Mean
8.5
9.0
8.3
11.4
9.1
7.1
10.1
24.3
2.4
1.4
7.5
O.I
3.9
 Excludes workers with no fixed place of work and workers who worked at home.

Source:  U.S. Department of Commerce, Bureau of the Census.  "The Journey to Work in the United States: 1975".
Population Reports. Special Studies, P-23,199, July 1979.
Current

-------
                                                           TABI,E  (•.

                                       MEANS OF TRANSPORTATION BY TRAVEL T.TME TO HORK
          (For the United States:  1975.  Workers 14 years old and over)
Means of
Transportation
to work
All workers
Automobile or truck
Drive alone
Car pool
Pnhlio Transportation
Bus or streetcar
Subway or elevated
Rai Iroad
Taxicab
nicycle
Motor cycle
Walk only
Other means
Total1
(thousands)
70,816
61.657
47,188
14.470
4,587
2,958
1,124
387
118
432
285
3,645
210
Percent.aqe distribution by travel time (minutes)
Total
1OO.O
100.0
100. 0
1OO.O
100. 0
10O.O
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
1OO.O
Less
than 10
minutes
21.5
20.5
22.3
14.5
2.9
2.9
0.7
1.3
28.8
38.4
2B.1
59.3
22.4
10 to 14
minutes
18.2
19.0
19.9
16.2
5.6
6.5
1.1
1.0
41.5
23.4
18.9
19.9
11.4
15 to 25
minutes
30.5
32.3
32.8
30.5
17.9
23.3
8.6
3.1
21.2
28.5
3O.2
15.3
29.0
25 to 29
minutes
4.6
4.9
4.8
5.3
3.5
4.6
1.6
0.8
2.5
2.1
3.9
0.7
2.4
3O to 34
minutes
11.6
11.6
10.7
14.6
19.1
21.1
19.9
5.9
3.4
4.4
12.3
2.7
4.8
35 to 49
minutes
8.4
7.8
6.6
11.6
22.9
21.5
30.7
18.1
-
2.8
5.6
1.7
7.1
50
mi nut
or mo
5.
3.
2.
7.
28.
20.
37.
69.
2.
0.
1.
0.
22.
 Excludes workers with no fixed place of work nnd workers who worked  at  home.
Source:  U.S. Department of Commerce, Rureau of the Census.  "The Journey  to
Population Reports, Special Studies, P-23,»99, July 1979.
                                                                                                                      Mean

                                                                                                                      19.9
                                                                                                                      19.1
                                                                                                                      17.8
                                                                                                                      23.2
                                                                                                                      39.5
                                                                                                                      35.4
                                                                                                                      45.0
                                                                                                                      62.4
                                                                                                                      13.2
                                                                                                                      12.1
                                                                                                                      16.0
                                                                                                                       8.7
                                                                                                                      29.5
Work in the United Statesi  1975,"  Current

-------
    Major sectors are agriculture, manufacturing, mining, construction,
    transportation, wholesale.trade, retail trade, finance/insurance/
    real estate, services, and government  (see Table 2, Chapter 3).
    These categories represent Standard Industrial Classification
    Divisions, and are commonly used for analyzing economic activity.

    Source I:  State departments of employment security or labor
    collect monthly data on "insured employment"  (i.e., insured
    through the state's employment insurance system).  The data
    are collected by establishment and published by two-, three-,
    or four-digit SIC for counties, and occasionally  for localities.

    Source II:  The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics publishes these
    data on an annual basis, for each state and 246 major labor
    areas within states, most of which are SMSAs.  Depending on
    the importance of the economic sector in the impact area,
    employment is shown at the SIC Division, 2-digit, or 3-digit
    level.  Historical data are included.  There is approximately
    a two-year publication lag.  Data are available in machine-
    readable form.  The data are published in Employment and
    Earnings; States and Areas.

    Source III:  A companion source to Source II, also issued by
    the U.S.  Bureau of Labor Statistics (BLS),  and available only
    in machine-readable form,  is referred to by BLS as "Total Wage
    Data."  The tape provides total employment by two-digit SIC
    on an annual basis, with a two-year lag for availability.
    Extracts for individual counties are available from BLS.
    Source IV:  Business directories published by states,
    localities, and private organizations show annual
    employment data by firm or establishment.   These data
    ,do not,  however,  include all firms in the area.   This
    source is not recommended.

B)   •   Total labor force

    •   Percent of labor force unemployed

    •   Total employment or number of employees

    •   Total unemployment

(Note:   These data are generally not available  by industry, except where
 otherwise mentioned  in this chapter.)

    Source I:   The U.S.  Bureau of Labor Statistics collects these
    data for  counties  on an annual basis,  with  a two-year lag.
    Extracts  from  the  data,  issued on tape as  "Current  Population
    Survey Labor Force Estimates,"  are  available.

    Source II:  Monthly estimates  of total labor force,  unemployment,
    and  employment for States,  counties and selected  areas are  avail-
    able on microfiche from BLS.  The series is titled State and County Employ-
    ment  and  Unemployment,  and the  lag  is  less  than a year.	—
                                  4-8

-------
       Source III:  State departments of labor or divisions of employment
       security generally issue monthly estimates of unemployment and
       employment for counties and SMSAs.   These data are prepared by
       those agencies under BLS guidelines and procedures.

       Source IV:  The U.S. Bureau of the Census1 County Business
       Patterns, contains estimates of the number of employees by
       county, excluding government employees, railroad employees,
       self-employed persons, and a few other categories.  These
       estimates are annual, with  a two- to three-year lag.

       Source V:  Revised 1977 PEERS Projections were issued in 1980
       by the U.S. Water Resources Council.  These projections will
       include historical data on total employment,* for Bureau of
       Economic Analysis Areas (BEAs), SMSAs, non-SMoA portions of
       BEAs, and water resource areas and subareas.

   C)  Wages or Earnings by Sector.

       Source I:  BLS "Total Wage" Data contains average weekly
       wages by 2-digit SIC for counties.

       Source II:   Employment and  Earnings:  States and Areas (BLS),
       contains average weekly earnings and average hourly earnings
       at the SIC Division,  2-digit  and 3-digit level of sectoral
       disaggregation.   For many industries,  however, earnings data
       are not shown.

       Source III:   The 1977 PEERS Projections,  U.S.  Water Resources
       Council,  contain historical data on total earnings by sixty
       industry categories  for BEAs,  SMSAs, non-SMSA portions of BEAs,
       and water resource regions  and sub-areas.

   (D)  Income.

       This may be expressed in several forms,  such as family,  personal,  house-
       hold,  or per capita  income.

       Source I:   Estimates  of total personal and per capita personal
       income by county are  published  every April in  the Survey of
       Current Business,  which is  issued by the  U.S.  Department of
       Commerce.   There is  a two-year  lag.

       Source II:   The  "Survey of  Buying Power,"  published  every
       August by Sales  S  Marketing Magazine,  contains estimates
       of average,  median household, and per  capita "effective
       buying income."   There  is a one-year lag.

       Source III:   The 1977 PEERS Projections include historical
       data on  total personal  income,  per  capita  income,  and per
''i.e.,  not differentiated by economic sector.
                                          4-9

-------
     capita income relative to the U.S.,  for BEAs,  SMSAs,  non-
     SMSA portions of BEAs,  and water resource regions and sub-
     areas.

 (E)  Payroll,

     Source:   Total first quarter and total annual  payroll by
     county is published annually in County Business Patterns.
     There is  a two-year lag.   Payroll is not disaggregated by
     economic  sector.

 (F)  Other Earnings Data

     Source I:  The 1977 PEERS Projections contain  data on earnings
     per worker and earnings per worker relative to the U.S.  for
     BEAs, SMSAs,  non-SMSA portions of BEAs,  and water resource
     regions and subareas.

     Source II;  State departments of revenue,  taxation, finance,
     or labor  may provide total earnings  and earnings per  worker
     for counties.

(G)   Population.

     Source I:  Estimates of the population of counties and
     metropolitan ar"eas within states are available on an
     annual basis from the U.S. Bureau of the Census, Current
     Population Reports, "Federal-State Cooperative Program
     for Population Estimates."  Each state is published.
     separately, and there is  a one-year  lag.  Data for selected
     previous  years are shown  for comparison.

     Source II:  The Commercial Atlas and Marketing Guide,
     published annually by Rand McNally and Company,  provides
     estimated population for  counties and communities.  The
     atlas for a given year  contains estimates as of January
     1st of that year.

     Source III:  The "Survey  of Buying Power," published  by
     Sales and Marketing Magazine,  gives  annual estimates  of
     population for counties, with a one-year lag.

     Source IV:  Local jurisdictions and  states conduct interim
     censuses  through departments of vital statistics,  planning,
     or economic development.   These estimates may  also be avail-
     able from regional planning agencies.

(H)   New Housing Units.

     Source:   The U.S.  Bureau  of the Census issues,  on  a monthly
     basis with a two- to three-month lag,  "Housing Units  Author-
     ized by Building Permits  and Public  Contracts,"  The  data
     are published by state, SMSA,  county,  and permit-issuing
     jurisdiction (generally a community).   Construction in areas
     that do not require permits is not covered.  At  the community
     and county level,  only  privately-owned housing units  are covered.

                                         4-10

-------
     (I)  Business Establishments,

         Source:  County Business Patterns, U.S. Bureau of the Census,
         publishes data on the total number of establishments, by nine
         employee-size classes, for counties.   There is a two-year
         publication lag.

    A good general guide to sources of Federal and State statistical data on
population, employment, and income is issued by the U.S. Department of Commerce,
Industry and Trade Administration.  The book,  Measuring Markets;   A Guide to
the Use of Federal and State Statistical Data, lists, for each program super-
vised by the State, the

    •   title of the publication

    «   geographic and demographic coverage

    •   frequency of data

    •   issuing  agency, and mailing  address

Because state sources are likely to be an excellent source of community and county
data, consult this guide to identify these sources.  An alternative source is
Environmental/Socioeconomic Data Sources/ issued October 1976 by the U.S. Depart-
ment of the Air Force and the U.S. Department of Commerce.

Techniques/Comment

    The description of the existing environment should not be exhaustive,  but
may include elements of the following,  according to your judgment as to the
relevant issues to emphasize:

    •   a brief history of the area

    •   a discussion of the composition of economic activity in the
        area, with emphasis on the most important economic sectors

    •   income, wages, and employment data

    •   population trends,  including migration into and out of
        the area

    •   a description of major interindustry relationships

    •   historical housing activity,  including a discussion of the
        geographic distribution of this activity

    •   special issues, such high unemployment,  dependence on one
        company, or recent high inmigration of population.

Emphasize major trends.  Incorporate community-level data,  if available.
Remember that some aspects of  the existing environment — such as infrastructure
                                          4-11

-------
and services—are covered in later steps of this chapter, and greater detail is
also provided in later steps for housing, employment, population, and other is-
sues.  As you reach each of these steps, a more detailed description of the
existing environment may be appropriate, and can provide a useful context for
evaluating the probable impact of the facility.

4.5  STEP 3:  DO A BASELINE PROJECTION OF THE IMPACT AREA WITHOUT THE PROJECT

Description

     The baseline projection comprises a forecast of some of the major economic
and demographic characteristics covered in the description of the existing envi-
ronment.  This projection assumes the absence of the facility.  Subsequent steps
of Level C  (Steps 4 to 23) measure the incremental effects of the project;  i.e.,
the effects of the project not accounted for by this Step 3 baseline projection
without the project.

     You may add these incremental effects to the baseline projection without
the project in order to produce a baseline projection with the project.  How-
ever, we have not included a discrete step for that purpose.  The conceptual
focus of the assessment techniques in this chapter and the principal concern of
the EIS is the incremental effects of the project;  i.e., the difference between
the future conditions without the project (the baseline projection) and the fu-
ture conditions with the project.

     The projection period is the near-term future of ten years.  This is con-
sistent with the time frame recommended in the Environmental Impact Assessment
Guidelines for Selected New Source Industries.*  ine accuracy of any projections
"it the subnational level beyond a ten-year period is highly questionable.   Ten
years also represents the time period over which the effects of  the facility
will be analyzed.

Data Output

    Essential categories:

    •   population

    •   per capita income

    •   total employment

    •   total personal income

    •   earnings or employment by sector.

    Other categories:

    •   total labor force

    •   new housing starts.

*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C., October, 1975.
                                    4-12

-------
Source
     I:  The first five items are available from an economic projection
         effort entitled OBERS, previously cited.  In 1972, the Water
         Resources Council published projections of economic activity
         for the nation and for a number of regional groupings:

              •  states

              •  SMSAs

              •  Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA)  areas

              •  water resources regions and subareas

              •  non-SMSA portions of the BEA areas

              •  non-SMSA portions of water resources subareas.

         Included were projections of population, personal income,
         employment, and earnings of persons by industry, for 1980,
         1985, 1990, 2000, and 2020.*  Revised OBERS projections were
         issued in 1974 and again in 1980.  The 1980 version revises
         the regional classifications and expands the number  of sec-
         tors to approximately 60 (see Appendix I.P.).

    II:  Local, county, and regional planning organizations prepare projections
         of population change, total employment or employment by industry,
         housing activity, and other economic and demographic components.  As
         an example, these projections may be included in a 208 Plan or State
         Implementation Plan covering all or part of the impact area.

   Ill:  Local economic development agencies or chambers of commerce may
         project economic activity for their "service" area, or be aware
         of relevant projections.

    IV:  State agencies — such as departments of commerce, public service
         commissions, or economic development commissions-project gross
         economic and demographic activity by county.

     V:  Departments of economics or political science at local universities
         issue special or continuing studies of economic or demographic
         activity at the. state or county level.
*There were 37 OBERS economic sectors in 1972,
                                       4-13

-------
Note to EPA regional office users of this manual

     The cost-effectiveness guidelines for the wastewater treatment facility
construction grants program includes procedures for establishing state and sub-
state population forecasts.  Consistent forecasts must, according to Agency
policy, be used for both air and water quality planning.  In practice, the popu-
lation forecasts approved by the Regional Administrators have been the OBERS
(Source I) projections.  However, it is possible that another set of population
forecasts has been approved in your region;  in accordance with cost-effective-
ness guidelines, you should use the forecasts approved by the Regional Adminis-
trator to assess secondary impacts.

Technique

     You  should rely most  heavily on the OBERS projection for the region most
closely approximating  the  impact area.  You should also pay particular attention
to  any 208 or SIP plans  for the impact area, as they provide projections based
on  local  input.  The advantage of local or regional plan documents is that they
are more  likely to incorporate projections at the county or community level.

     Review the assumptions underlying the projections. 'For example, a projected
rate of unemployment of  2.5% over the ten-year period may seriously flaw an other-
wise apparently useful study, if you know, from the description of the existing
environment, that current  unemployment in the area is 11% and shows no signs of
abating.  Similarly, review the methodological basis for the projection.  A
simple extrapolation of  historical data is less desirable than an analysis which
probes fundamental shifts  in the economic base of the community, changes in
migration patterns, or similar determinants of future activity.

     Prepare a summary baseline projection from the available studies.  Cover
at  least the seven categories listed previously as outputs from this step.  Range
estimates are acceptable if several well-founded projections are available.  Pre-
pare the projection for  ten years hence.-

4.6 STEP 4:  ESTIMATE DIRECT EMPLOYMENT

Description

    This step estimates  the direct employment (E*) requirements of the project —
broken down into construction and operating workforce — for the first ten years
of  the project, beginning with the first year of construction.

Data Output

     See description above and Table 1,  Chapter 3, Section 3.4.

Data Source

     A)   the permit applicant

     B)   if the applicant refuses,  contact the  appropriate  local  economic
         development  agency or chamber of  commerce.  These parties are
         sufficiently familiar  with  the  facility to accurately  estimate
         direct employment.


                                        4-14

-------
Technique

     Follow Step 2 of Level B—See Section 3.4 of Chapter 3.

4.7  STEP 5:  CALCULATE NON-LOCAL EMPLOYMENT

Description

     From the previous step you know that the new source is estimated to create
E* employees each year.  The local labor force may supply some of this employ-
ment (E]_oca]_) .   Estimate the local component, and then calculate the net direct
employment increment that  must be met by new workers moving into the impact
area.  Estimate this local component for two years within the ten-year projec-
tion period«

     1)  the year during the construction phase of maximum employment.
         This maximum employment period may include some operations
         workers;

     2)  the year during the operations phase representing the stable
         operating workforce.   Typically, this will be a year after
         construction is completed.

     As discussed in Chapter 3, Section  3.5,  Step 3,  there  is the possibility
that the year of maximum total direct employment may  be  a year other  than those
in which either maximum construction or  stable operating employment occurs.  In
such a case, calculate the local component also

     3)  for the year of maximum total direct employment  (Efc).   This
         year will include both construction  and operations workers.

Do the analysis, in Steps 6, 7. 8, and 10 for  the year of peak construction
employment, stable operating' employment, and  (if different)  peak total_ employment.

Data Output

     A)  the portion of the direct employment requirement  (E*)
         supplied from the local labor force  
-------
Technique

     Follow Step 3 of Level B - see Section 3.5,

4.8  STEP 6:  CALCULATE INDIRECT EMPLOYMENT

Description

     Indirect employment represents employment in other economic sectors attribu-
table to the facility but not directly associated with it.  It includes employ-
ment in firms which supply inputs or receive outputs from the facility, and
which locate in proximity to the facility (i.e./ in the impact area), as well as
employment in commercial or service sector activity necessary to sustain the popu-
lation increase arising from both the employment at the facility and at supplier/
buyer firms.

Data Output

     A)   the total direct and indirect employment (ET)  attributable to the
         facility, for the two  (or three) years of analysis within the ten-year
         period. *

Data Input/Source

     A)   the net direct employment (E) attributable to the facility.
            *

     Source:  Step 5

     B)   employment by major economic sector, except agriculture, in the
         current year.

     Source:  See Step 2,  "Describe the Existing Environment" — there
     are several sources.   See also Figure 5, Chapter 3a

     C)   employment by major economic sector for that year which is ten
         years after construction of the facility has begun.

     Source:  U.S. Water Resources Council,  1977 PEERS Pro jections

     D)   Population in the current year.

     Source:  U.S. Bureau of.the Census, Current Population Reports,
     Series P-26.

     E)   Population for that year which is ten years after construction
         of the facility has begun.

     Source:  U.S. Water Resources Council, op. cit.

     F)   Employment in agriculture for the current year.
  *i.e., the years of  1) maximum construction  employment,  2)  operations  employment,
   and 3) maximum total direct employment.
                                       4-16

-------
    •  Source:   U.S.  Bureau of  the Census,  the most  recent Census of
      Agriculture.   Data may have to be  interpolated,  if the Census  is  not
      current.

      G)  Employment in agriculture for  that year which  is  ten years
         after construction of  the facility has begun.

      Source:   Extrapolate U.S.  Census of  Agriculture  data.

Technique

      The technique  for calculating the  indirect employment multiplier  for  the
current year is discussed in  Section 3,6, and an example is given in Figure 5,
Chapter 3.  Because the data are more geographically disaggregated at Level C, a.
more  accurate  multiplier is calculated  at Level C  than  at  Level B.

      Calculating a  multiplier for the year ten years  after beginning of  construc-
tion  allows you to  discern any  significant projected  shifts in economic  activity.
If  there is a  substantial change in this  multiplier,  the current and future
year  multiplier, applied to the estimates of net direct employment effectively
define the range of indirect  employment impact.

4,9  STEP  7:   CALCULATE DIRECT  AND INDIRECT POPULATION  EFFECTS

Description

      This  represents the population attributable to both direct and indirect
employment.  This population  includes the workers, and  the workers' families.
Data  Output

      A)  total maximum direct and indirect population attributable to  the
         facility for the two (or'three) years  of analysis  within the ten-year period.*

Data  Input/Source

      A)  total direct and indirect employment  (E-j)  attributable to  the facility in
         the two  (or three) years.

      Source:   Step  6

Technique

      The technique  for calculating total  maximum direct and indirect population
(pT) is discussed in Section 3.7, and is illustrated in  Figure 5, Chapter 30

4.10  STEP 8:   ESTIMATE THE NUMBER OF NEW HOUSEHOLDS

Description

     An estimate of  the number of households implied by the total maximum direct
and indirect population is necessary in order to calculate the number of housing
units necessary to accomodate this population.

    *i.e., the  years of 1) maximum construction employment,  2) stable operations
    employment, and 3) maximum  total direct employment.
                                         4-17

-------
 Data Output

      A)   Number of households  for the  two  (or  three) years of analysis within
          the ten-year period.*

 Data Input/Source

      A)   Average household  size

      Source I:   US Bureau of the  Census, Statistical Abstract of  the
      United States.  1978.

      Source II:  YOU may calculate an  average  household size for  the
      State  containing  the impact  area  by obtaining  number of households
      and  population from a  state  department of commerce or analogous
      agency.  Divide population by number  of households.

      B) Total direct and indirect population  (PT)  attributable  to the facility.

      Source: Step  7.

 Technique

      The  technique  is discussed in Section 3.8, Level B.  Either  use  a default
 value of  2.85 to 2.95, or use one of the two sources for average  household size
 listed abqve.

 4.11  STEP  9:   REVIEW  THE EXISTING HOUSING MARKET

Description

     There may be an adequate amount of housing in the impact area to satisfy
 the needs of the incoming population.  The purpose of this step is to estimate
 the composition of current housing and the number of vacant units.

Data Output:

     A)   Number of vacant housing units available in the current year.

Data Input/Source

     A)   Composition of housing by single-family, multi-family,  and mobile
         home.

     Source;  U.S. Bureau of the  Census, General Housing Characteristics
     gives housing by community.  This census  is published every  ten years.
     The  latest housing census was in  1980.  There is a three-year publication
      lag.
^••fi.f the years of 1) maximum construction employment, 2) stable operations employ-
ment, and 3) maximum total direct employment.
                                        4-18

-------
      B)   Number of vacant year-round units at the last census,

      Source:   U,S. Bureau of the Census,  op.cit.

      C)   Current vacancy rate,  rental and for sale units.

      Source:   Realtors  identified through the National Roster of  Realtors.

      D)   Current composition of housing  stock.  This  can  be  used  to
          update the Census information.   Not all  communities, however,
          keep  good records on housing stock.

      Source:   Local assessor  or building  inspector.   Either  of  these  two
      sources can provide information on both building permits and demoli-
      tions.  These data  can be  used to adjust the Census  data for number
      of  housing units.   Local utilities are  also  a possible  source of
      updated building  stock data.

      E)   Future composition and/or quantity  of housing.

      Source:   The baseline projection for the impact  area.

There are several other  possible  sources  for  all  five of  the  categories listed
above:

      •   particularly for a large  project  with substantial employment,
         the site  selection study  may contain  a detailed analysis  of
         the current and  future  housing market, with an estimate of
         vacant available units.

      •   208 and SIP plans

      •   local  or  regional  planning  agencies.

Techniques

      The  technique  for estimating the  availability of  vacant units is discussed
in Step  7, Level  B,  Section 3.9.  You  should work with community-level data,
although  county-level data are an acceptable substitute.

4.12  STEP 10:  ESTIMATE THE  NUMBER OF NEW HOUSING UNITS REQUIRED

Description

     Using the data  from the previous  two steps, this step estimates the short-
fall of housing in  the impact area and, therefore, the number of new housing
units that must be  constructed.   The available current vacancies are compared
with the number of households requiring housing for both the year of stable
                                          4-19

-------
operations, the year of maximum employment during the construction phase, and (if
different), the year of maximum total direct employment.  This comparison is par-
ticularly important if the facility has a large construction workforce, and a
short peak employment period.

Data Output

     A)  Total number of new housing units required to meet the requirements
         of the direct and indirect population attributable to the new source.

Data Input

     A)  Number of households represented by the direct and indirect population.

     Source:  Step 8.

     B)  Number of vacant units, current year.

     Source:  Step 9.

Technique

     The technique is discussed in Step 8, Level B, Section 3.10.   Some comments
about the procedure:

     !)•  You are interested primarily in identifying the incremental effects
         of the facility on the local housing market.  It is desirable to
         work with the current-year estimate of housing availability, rather
         than an estimate or projection of availability in future years.
         This allows you to  estimate  the  expansion of  the current housing
         stock that will be necessary to handle the new households.  If
         the comparison of new households to the number of current vacant
         units indicates a housing deficiency, it does not matter that
         there may be plans to construct new housing; rather, the salient
         fact is that the housing does not currently exist and its construc-
         tion cannot be assumed.  A shortage  of available housing is an
         indication of potential pressures on infrastructure  and the service
         sector, as well as potential physical impacts.

     2)  However,  you should review the baseline or other projections of
         housing growth and economic activity in the impact area,  to identify
         recent growth patterns in the housing sector,  and probable expansion
         of this sector in future years.  A projected expansion of the
         housing base greater than or equal to the number of units required
         by the incoming population should be considered in evaluating the
         effects of the facility.  In particular, you should consider the
         timing of this expansion relative to the timing of the employment
         and population influx attributable to the facility.  We emphasize
         again that these new units cannot be taken as a given, i.e, there
         is no guarantee that they will ever be constructed.

         Similarly, if your review of the baseline projection indicates that the
         area has been experiencing a long-term decline in population and economic
         activity, the number of vacant units available may increase in future years,


                                           4-20

-------
          as individuals leave the area.  This trend may alleviate any
          potential housing shortage due to the facility.  You must recog-
          nize that this trend may not continue, and that a major reason
          for the reversal of this trend may be the siting of the facility
          in the area, especially if it is a large employer.

      3)   The technique discussed in Section 3.10 assumes that existing
          housing is filled before any new housing 'is constructed.  Our
          review of the literature has found no support for the notion of
          'structural vacancy",  i.e.,  representing substandard housing that
          will not be filled even in cases of future housing shortages.
          You should assume that, in periods of strong demand for housing,
          all available units will be taken.

          It is possible,  however, that this assumption overstates the true
          number of available units in the current market and understates
          the number of new units that will be required.   In particular,
          if the population influx associated with a project is low enough
          and slow enough,  the existing vacancy rate may  be maintained
          throughout the life of the project,  as new housing units are
          completed.   Therefore,  the vacancy rate will never reach zero.
          The level of vacancy maintained during the life of the project
          depends upon:

          •   the relative  size of the  construction workforce and operating
             workforce,  e.g.,  a  large  construction workforce for a short
             period may  put pressure on the housing market and effectively
             reduce the  vacancy  rate to zero.

          •   a  town experiencing  high  growth may be completing many new
             housing  units  every  year,  whereas  a relatively rural  town
             with large  recent outmigration may have completed virtually
             no  units  recently.

          Therefore,  consider  the length of the construction  period,  the
          relative  sizes of construction  and operating staff,  and  the  econony
          of  the  town  in determining the  effect on  the existing vacancy rate.
          If  you  feel  that  the employment increase  will be  gradual,  do  not
          use a  zero vacancy rate  in calculating the  number of  new  units
          required, but rather use a higher  vacancy rate  assumption. (See Figure
          9) a  This will effectively increase the number of units required, or
          reduce the surplus of housing units.   The higher vacancy rate should
          approximate the historical figure for the impact area.

4.13  STEP 11:   ALLOCATE NEW  HOUSING  UNITS  AMONG COMMUNITIES
     If there is insufficient existing housing to  accommodate  the  incoming  direct
and indirect population, new housing will be constructed.  The spatial alloca-
tion of thse units assumes that construction of these units will take place  first
lr* the host and contiguous communities, and then in communities more distant in
fche commutershed.
                                    4-21

-------
                 EXAMPLE OF DIFFERENT VACANCY  RATE ASSUMPTIONS

                                    (Step 10)


 Example;   Arlington,  New York,  an unincorporated community of 11,200 people,
 currently  has  3,583  year-round housing units,  of which 140,  or 3.9% are vacant.
 The  nearby town  of Wappingers  Falls,  with a population of 5,607,  has 1,994 year-
 round  housing  units,  of  which  154 are vacant,  or 7.7%.

     Case  1

     A large surface  coal-mining  operation is  locating just  outside of  Arlington,
 and  will result  in about 250 new  households moving  into this area almost immedi-
 ately.  These  households represent the stable  operating workforce.   Assume that
 Arlington  and  Wappingers Falls are isolated, and are  therefore the only communi-
 ties where these households can locate.

     If we assume that a zero  vacancy rate is  a  possibility,  the  294 vacant units
 in these two communities will  be  sufficient to accommodate the 250 new households
 moving into the  area.

     Case  2

     Assume, on  the other hand, that  the  same  coal mining  operation will locate
 in the area.   However, in this  case,  there will  be several years  of site work,
 involving  a small workforce, followed by  a gradual increase  in the  workforce
 until a stable level  is  reached after ten years-.  Again, this  stable workforce
will result in 250 new households  in  the  area.

     Because the two  communities will  have  a long period to prepare for  this
 influx, it is  expected that new housing units will be constructed for most  of
the households, and that  the~demand for housing will not result in  a zero
vacancy rate.  The vacancy rate will probably not decline  below 3.5% in  either
community,  which is the  long-term historical rate for these communities,  although
current rates are higher.

     If the new households take over  some of the existing vacancies,  and  the
vacancy rate declines to  3.5%,   15 existing units will be occupied in  Arlington
an<* 85 units in Wappingers Falls-, for a total of 110,  Therefore, 140  new  units
 (250-Ho) will be required in the two communities over the ten-year period  to
accommodate the 250 new households-.
                                  FIGURE 9
                                    4-22

-------
Data Output

     A)  Number of new housing units, by type, by community or county in the
         impact area.

Data Input

     A)  Number of total new housing units required by the direct and indirect
         incoming population.

     Source:   Step 10.

     B)  Land use map for the communities in the impact area.


    Source I;  local  planning board.

          II:  regional planning agency/ areawide water quality
               management agency.

         Ill:  State  department of community affairs

          IV:  U.S. Geological Survey, quadrangle maps

           V:  There  are areas where no land use maps are available.  You
               may develop them, albeit at some expense.- by

               •  having the impact area flown over, and then interpreting
                  the aerial photographs.  We recommend that you rely upon
                  a reputable aerial photography service listed in
                  Photogrammetric Engineering

               •   you may obtain  recent aerials at minimal cost from the
                  National Cartographic Information Center,  U,S Geological
                •  Survey,  Reston, Virginia,   The  Center stocks  maps
                  developed  by Federal agencies.

 land use map should  identify the following  uses;

    •   Residential

       —single-family
       —multi-family
       —mobile homes

    •   Commercial/Service/Retail

    •  Manufacturing/Warehouse

    •  Public Land

      —parks and recreation
      —community facilities
      —schools
      —conservation land
                                      4-23

-------
 •  semi-public uses

    —churches
    —hospitals
    —golf courses
    —highways/streets
    —agriculture.


   wil? iikSly t0 °btain 3 current'^ar land use map; therefore, some up-
   will be required.  Sources are:

 •   building permit data to determine type and location of recent
    development,  which should then be mapped.

 •   utility data  should cover new connections  to residential and
    non-residential users.

 •   real estate agents have an incomplete, but useful,  knowledge of
    new development.

 •   tax assessor  maps  frequently indicate  land uses  and can be
    compared to the land use map you have  already obtained.

 The new development should be plotted on  an overlay and then compared  to
 the land use map.   This aids in identifying the recent pattern of  develop-
 ment.

 C)  Persons per acre in developed areas.

 Source:   building  inspector  or tax assessor.   At a  minimum,  obtain the
 density  for  recent residential development, i.e., in the last  five years.
 You may  compare this  to the  density of older  units,  but this is  not
 essential,   if these  sources are not able to  assist you,  use the default
 values  in Table  7.

 D)   Location  of recent new residential development  in  relation  to  existing
    development.

 Source:   discussed previously  under land  use  maps above.

 E)   Density of development  (persons or units  per acre)   for the previous
    five  years.

Source:  building inspector, electric utility.

F)   Location and amount of remaining developable land.

Source:   land use maps.
                                    4-24

-------
                              TABLE  7
                  SUGGESTED HOUSING DENSITIES
                                                               (2)
          Dwelling Type                       Persons Per Acre
        Single-family detached                        15
        Single-family semi-detached                   21
        Single-family attached                        31

        Two-family detached                           21
        Two-family semi-detached                      31

        Multifamily dwellings                       33-76

        Mobile home or trailer                        21
   Default values for Step 11 ,
   Assuming average family size of 2.9 persons.

Source:  (l) Koppelman and DeChiara, Urban Planning and Design Criteria, and
(2) Hamilton, Robert Todd, Alternative Housing Designs that Facilitate Human
Activity at Four Density Situations-, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
unpublished thesis.
                                 4-25

-------
Technique

     Initially, assume that any new housing will locate in the host community
a"d any contiguous communities, considered as a single housing market.  This
step allocates units among communities, not within communities (Step 12).  This
allocation relies heavily upon consultation with realtors, assessors, and
inspectors, as well as your review of the land use map, and an analysis of the
pattern and extent of recent development.  Lack of developable land in a
community automatically precludes the development of new housing in a community-
this lack of developable land also places any sensitive areas in the community
at risk.   (See Step 20).

    Ask  local officials (planning board, department of community affairs, real-
tors,  assessor or inspector) to estimate where the new housing units will be
built.   Compare their responses with the patterns of recent development identi-
fied from the land use map.  Local officials may suggest a community that has
not seen recent development, but which contains available land.  In this case
the official is essentially forecasting a shift in recent development patterns.

     Once you have allocated units (or persons) to specific communities, you
should do a quick test to determine whether sufficient developable land is
available for these units.

     First, assume that all units will be single-family and calculate the
acreage required.

     Second, assume that all units will be multifamily high-rise, and calculate
the acreage required.

     We strongly encourage the use of local estimates of housing density (persons
per acre).  However, the default values we supplied in Table 7 can be used.
The estimates of acreage derived by assuming single-family construction, and then
multi-family high-rise, effectively defines the range of possible land consump-
tion :

     •  if the amount of available developable land approximates or
        exceeds that required assuming all single-family construction,
        then the available land is sufficient.

     •  if, however, the amount of developable land approximates that
        required assuming all multifamily housing, then the available
        developable land is probably inadequate to accommodate all of
        the allocated housing units, unless there is good reason to
        believe that only multi-family housing will be built.  Some
        units must therefore be allocated to other communities.

Iri boomtown situations, it is assumed that the use of mobile homes will be far
higher than the existing typology would indicate.  Therefore, in applying the
test of available developable land within a community, use the density for
mobile homes (Table 7) „
                                      4-26

-------
 The definition of a boomtown in this  manual is:

      an isolated,  small  community  with an inadequate pool  of  construc-
      tion workers  and inadequate facilities  to  accommodate this  labor
      force.   Hundreds or thousands of workers must be  brought in  from
      elsewhere during the construction period, leading to  severe  short-
      ages of  housing, retail and professional services,  and public
      facilities.   A boomtown is a  small community  (usually less than
      10,000 to 15,000 people before any population influx  associated
      with the project begins)  that is the central business area lo-
      cated in a county remote from any large  population  center.   Occa-
      sionally,  a boomtown is a company-sponsored new town.  Development
      of  significant permanent housing is  unlikely to occur during the
      boom phase.   Projects leading to boomtown effects have a construc-
      tion workforce many times  larger than  the operating workforce.

If  the host and contiguous community  have insufficient available  developable
land  for  all  of the new  housing units that  will  be required,  housing units
should be allocated to successively distant communities in the commutershed.
If  you or the  local officials believe that  there is a  limit to the number of
new housing units  that will  be  constructed  in a  community—other  than the con-
straint imposed by  the availability of  developable land—then you may override
the requirement that all  of  the developable land in the host  and  contiguous
towns must be consumed before construction may occur elsewhere.   In other words,
you may allocate new units to communities more distant in  the commutershed, even
though not all developable land in  the  host or contiguous  communities has been
consumed.

An example of the application of Step 11  is given in Figure 10.

4.14  STEP 12: ' CALCULATE'RESIDENTIAL SITE REQUIREMENTS FOR NEW HOUSING UNITS

Description

      After units are allocated  to  communities, calculate the  total acreage
required  by these  units,  taking into  account  the typology  of  these units, i.e.
single-family,  multi-family,  mobile home.
     A)  Type of new housing units by community: single-family, multi-
         family, mobile home.

     B)  Amount of land (in acres) consumed by each type of housing and
         total for all housing by community.

Data Input/Source

     A)  Number of new housing units allocated to specific communities.

     Source:  Step 11,
                                        4-27

-------
    B)  Average housing density for each type of housing in the impact area.
        Try to obtain density by community, especially for recent development.
        You may use the default values given in  Table 7.


     Source;  tax assessor, building inspector, or default values

     C)  Existing typology of housing units by community,

     Source:  Step 9.

Technique

     Assume that the typology of new units constructed will conform to the
typology of recently-constructed existing housing.  Apportion the new housing
to each of these types.  Apply the average housing densities to the number of
units in each category to estimate new acreage required for residential growth.

     As discussed in Step 11, in boomtown situations you should assume that a
large number of mobile homes or temporary structures will be used, and that
the existing housing typology is not a good guide to the type of housing that
will be constructed.  Ask local economic development officials, local planners,
and the company to estimate the number or percentage of mobile homes that will
be used.
     You should also consult with the applicant to determine if he or she feels
that the typology of recently-construeted existing housing is appropriate for  the
construction and operations workers of the project.   If the applicant recommends
an alternative typology and provides adequate justification for it, use this typology
(with the average housing densities  from Table  7) to  carry out this step.  An example
of the application of Step 12 is given in Figure 10.

4.15  STEP 13:  ALLOCATE NEW HOUSING UNITS WITHIN COMMUNITIES
Description

     This step is particularly important for the analysis of effects on sensitive
areas  (Step 20) and noise and pesticides impacts  (Steps 18 and 19).  Local consul-
tation is highly desirable to carry out this step;  however, you can rely upon the
information developed in Step 11 to complete this allocation.  Recall that in  Step
11 you gathered and/or produced updated land use maps which show the location  of
recent residential development in the impact area.  This information can be used
for this step to allocate units within communities.

Data Output

     A)  Probable location of new housing units within each community in
         the impact area.

Data Input/Source

     A)  Number and type of new housing units, by community.

     Source:  Step 12.

     B)  Location of recent new residential and other development.

     Source:  Step 11.
                                             4-28

-------
 (Please note that much of the information given in this example is hypothetical.)


     A surface coal mine will be opened near Arlington, New York.  The population
influx attributable to the project will be gradual — ten years after the initia-
tion of the project, 250 new households will have moved into the area.  Given the
gradual nature of this influx, the Step 10 analysis indicates that 140 new housing
units will be constructed to accommodate these households.  The new units will be
located either in Arlington or Wappingers Falls.

     The local planning board and several realtors have indicated that virtually
all of the new units will probably be constructed in Arlington, rather than
Wappingers Falls.  Arlington is the larger business center and community of the
two, and has experienced more recent development, although neither community has
had much growth in recent years.

     The most recent land use map for the two communities was done several years
ago.  However, the assessor's office was able to pinpoint the location of some
recent residential and commercial development, virtually all of which was in
Arlington.

     Of the 140 new units , then, we assume initially that 120 will be located in
Arlington, and 20 in Wappingr.rs Falls.  Assuming first that all of these units
will be single- family detached structures, site requirements are:

            Arlington                     23 acres
            Wappingers Falls               4 acres.

Assuming next that all units will be in small multifamily structures, site
requirements are:

            Arlington                     11 acres

            Wappingers Falls               2 acres.

These estimates are based upon an average household size of 2.9, and the default
housing densities in Table 5.  In particular, we assumed a density of 15 persons
Per acre for single-family housing,  and 33 persons per acre for multi-family
            No local estimates of housing density were available.
     Arlington and Wappingers Falls both have several thousand acres of develop-
     land available within their boundaries, so there is sufficient room for the
new development.

     The current typology of housing in the two communities is:
      Figure 10.  &le of the Application of Step 11, "Allocate New
                  Housing Units Within Comunities ," and Step 12,   .
                  "Calculate Residential Site Requirements"
                                          4-29

-------
  Figure 10.  continued
                                         Arlington        Wappingers Falls

            one-unit structures          1,729  (48.2%)      765  (38.3%)

            two or more unit structures  1,756  (49.0%)    1,223  (61.3%)

            mobile home or trailer          98  (2.7%)         6  (0.4%)

Recent development has shown a slight trend to more one-unit structures, but the
current typology is probably representative of the new housing that will be
built to accommodate the new households.  The expected development does not
qualify as a boomtown, so mobile homes will continue to be an uncommon form of
housing in the area.

     Table J-l shows the predicted types of new housing that will be built in the
two communities, and the estimated site requirements of this housing.  For one-unit
structures, we used a density of 15 persons per acre, and for two or more unit
structures we used a density of 31 persons per acre.

     Recent development in the town of Arlington has been moving linearly along
major state highways toward a significant state park containing a wetland.
Although there are few residences near the park, it is possible that many of
the new units will be constructed near this area.  Local realtors and the
assessor indicate that much of the development will occur near the park, and
this is verified by the pattern of recent development.  The sensitive area
analysis in Step 20 should consider the potential effects of the new housing
on the park and wetland.
                                            4-30

-------
                          Table 8

                                                  (1)

           TYPE OF NEW UNITS AND SITE REQUIREMENTS
Arlington                   Number of Units         Acres Required



                                  58                     11
One- unit                          30



Two or more units                 59


                                   T                     0.5
Mobile home                        J
  Total
                                  12°                     17''5
Wappingers  Falls



One-unit                           8                      1<5



Two or more units                  12



Mobile home                        °                      	


   Total                           20          '            2.5
 {1)This table is part of the Figure 10 example application of

    Steps 11 and 12.
                                  4-31

-------
     C)  Updated land use map—this land use map will include an overlay
         showing the data in B) above.  The overlays to the land use map
         should also include and highlight

         1)  areas unlikely to experience future development, such as

             •  fully-developed areas

             •  privately-owned forests or other resource areas

             •  publicly-owned lands

         2)  features that inhibit development, such as

             •  steep slopes

             •  soil conditions unsuitable for construction

             •  land adjoining sites such as airports, industrial
                areas, disposal sites, mines, or quarries

         3)  areas with legal or institutional protection such as those
             listed under Step 20 of this chapter.  These are areas which
             should be protected or enhanced.

     Source:  Step 11, and the sources listed under Step 20,

Technique

     Consult with local planners, realtors, the building inspector, the tax assessor,
and other city officials.  Indicate to these parties that you expect 'X1 number of
housing units will be developed in the community, requiring  'Y' number of acres.
Ask them to predict, on the land use map, the probable specific location of these
units.

     Given that these predictions of the location of new housing involve  uncer-
tainty, you should attempt to reduce the burden on local officials of predicting
specific spatial location patterns.  Use an overlay or coloring system that re-
flects the likelihood of development.  You should use at least three colors or
identifiers to show areas which these officials feel

     •  are very likely to be developed

     •  have moderate likelihood of being developed

     •  are not likely to be developed.

Compare these predictions with your information concerning recent development pat-
terns, and the location of available developable land, and modify their estimates,
if appropriate.  Transfer the information on the probable location of housing units
to a single overlay, and include this overlay in the environmental impact statement.
                                        4-32

-------
     In consulting with local officials, you may encounter some significant dis-
crepancies in the predicted location of new housing units.  If this occurs,
compile a set of overlays which show the different predicted locations.  Consult
again with the same local officials, and ask them if they wish to revise their
predictions, based on the estimates supplied by others.  This exercise should
lead to changes in some original predictions, and the development of reasonably
congruent estimates.

4.16  STEP 14:  ESTIMATE NEW RESIDENTIAL INFRASTRUCTURE DEMAND

Description

     The introduction of new population and new housing units into a community
may make significant demands upon:

        water supply
        health care
        highways and local roads
        hospitals
        wastewater treatment
        recreation
        libraries
        police and fire protection
        solid waste disposal capacity.

If  existing  infrastructure is  inadequate,  there may also be serious community
fiscal  impacts.  Therefore, you may carry  out an optional  fiscal analysis.

Data Output

     A)  Additional infrastructure and personnel required  to service the
         incoming population,  particularly that element of the population
         housed  in new units.

     B)  Analysis of community revenues and expenditures.  We recommend
         that this analysis be undertaken  only for those communities for
         which the predicted additional infrastructure requirements are
         significant relative  to  existing  infrastructure.

Data Input

     A)  Incoming population,  by  community, housed in new  residential
         units.

     Source:  Use the Step 11  estimate of  new units within communities,
     multiplied by average household size.

     B)  Current level of infrastructure by community.  Depending upon the
         infrastructure category, the measures of infrastructure capacity
         are  expressed in terms of personnel, number of facilities, size
         of  facilities, etc.   The indicators for each category are given
         in Appendix II, A, Infrastructure Standards.
                                       4-33

-------
     Source:   local agency responsible for the provision of the service
     or infrastructure.   Other sources include a department of community
     affairs, a local or regional planning agency, or an economic develop-
     ment agency.

     C)  Number of new housing units, by community.

     Source:   Step 11.

     D)  Standards or multipliers for public service or infrastructure.

     Source:   Appendix II.A  provides standards based on national averages.
     We recommend that you develop a corresponding set of state standards by
     consulting the state agency, such as the Board of Health, or Department
     of Education, responsible for regulating or overseeing the particular
     public service or infrastructure activity.  Similarly, local agencies
     consulted for B)  above may have more stringent standards.

     E)  Standard facility cost estimates.

     Source:  F.W.  Dodge, Construction Cost Manual or Dodge Digest of
     Building Costs and Specifications.

     F)  Analysis of current revenues and expenditures.

     Source:   annual audit report to the Board of Commissioners, City Council,
     etc.

     G)  (Optional)  Assessed valuation of the facility (projected), current
         assessed valuation rates by type of housing unit, and current assessed
         valuation per capita.

     Source:   local tax assessor.

Technique  (See  Figure 11 for two examples of this technique)„

     National-average public service multipliers are given in Appendix II.A.
Apply these multipliers to the estimate of the population in new housing units,
or to the estimate of new units, in order to project the marginal infrastructure
requirements associated with the new>activity.  Compare these requirements with
reserve capacity at existing facilities.  An effective way to evaluate the avail-
ability of gas,  electric power, "and "telephone services is to present the local
utilities with projections of the number and probable location of new units.

     Although .there may be plans to expand existing infrastructure, do not
assume that this infrastructure will be available, unless construction is
underway.  This assumption provides the most conservative estimate of the
demands that the facility will make on the local community.

     For each category of infrastructure for which a deficiency is estimated,
after allowing for currently available reserve, ask local officials if there
are plans to expand this infrastructure.  Do not, however, assume that these
facilities .will be constructed;  The most responsible position for you to take
in regard to facility expansion is to point out the existence of current
deficiencies, and then discuss any local plans to meet these deficiences.  The


                                      4-34

-------
               ESTIMATING NEW RESIDENTIAL INFRASTRUCTURE DEMANDS

                                   (Step 14)
     The case is the same as Figure 9, a surface coal mining plant locating near
Arlington, New York.  Assume that Case 1 applies, i.e., that 250 households will
move into the area almost immediately.

Example 1 - Solid Waste;

     Arlington and WappingersFalls share a landfill, which serves a population
of 16,800.  The 250 households moving to the area will each generate about 9.2
pounds of solid waste per day, assuming

            first adult in household          6.5 pounds
            succeeding adults                 2.5 pounds
            children                          1.5 pounds.

The 2,300 pounds per day additional solid waste represents about a 4 percent
increase over the 54,000 pounds currently generated.  There is no municipal
collection system — individuals are responsible for hauling their own waste
to the landfill.

     The currently projected life of the landfill is 10 years.  This projection
assumes no population growth in the area, and in fact, a slight decline is a
possibility.  The additional 23,000 pounds of waste over the ten-year period
will reduce the life of the landfill by less than half a year.

Example 2 - Electric Power;

     Central Hudson Gas and Electric serves the two communities.  Because the
new households will occupy existing vacant units which already have hookups,
there is no need to provide new distribution infrastructure.  The recent growth
in electric demand in the utility's service areas has been far below projections;
therefore, the company has sufficient generating capacity to accommodate 250 new
households,
                                  FIGURE  11
                                    4-35

-------
 salient  fact, however,  is  that  the deficiency  currently  exists,  and  that  expan-
 sion of  deficient  facilities  cannot be assumed.

 (Optional Fiscal Analysis)

     Estimate future capital  expenditures  to overcome  infrastructure deficiencies
 by applying  standard facility cost multipliers from F.W. Dodge's Construction
 Cost Manual.  The  use of this manual  is discussed  in Appendix  I.E.   Compare the
 resulting capital  costs to the  bonding limit for the relevant  government  subunit,
 taking into  account the fact  that some governments have  special  authorities, such
 as sewer authorities, for  certain public services, and that  these authorities
 have their own bonding "limit.

     Add the additional debt  required to finance these facilities to the  existing
 debt level for the community, and compare  the  total with existing debt  levels.

     Compute  debt financing or carrying costs.  Refer to  a standard amortization
 table — the information needed to use this table  is

     •   the  number of years over which the debt is financed

     •   the relevant nominal  interest rate.

Add these carrying costs as expenditures to the current  account.

     Estimate the revenues  from the facility based on  the assessed valuation of
 the facility and the appropriate valuation rate for the  type of  facility.  Note
 that many facilities are allowed to make payments  in lieu of taxes.  Consult
 the tax  assessor.

     Apply assessed valuation per type of dwelling unit  to the new units  to
estimate the revenue from  this  tax source,  Note that  assessed valuation  per
capita may show an increase or  decrease depending on the contribution of  the
 facility.  An increase is  likely if estimated revenues  from the facility and
 the new  housing are not adequate to meet expenditures  for expansion  of infra-
 structure.

 4.17  STEP 15:  ESTIMATE SITE REQUIREMENTS FOR SERVICE SECTOR  DEVELOPMENT

Description

     If  the facility has direct and indirect employment and population effects
 (Steps 6 and 7), there will be  service sector development attributable to the
facility,  The physical impacts of service sector expansion are generally
minor.   Vehicular traffic generated by trips to service sites are subsumed
under Step 16.   Service employment is subsumed under indirect  employment  in Step 6<

Data Output

     A)   Location of new service sector activity,

     B)   Estimated number of acres required by this new activity.
                                      4-36

-------
Data Input

     A)  Current location of service sector activity.

     Source;  updated land use map, Step 11,

     B)  Location of new housing, by community.

     Source:  Step 13.

     C)  Current population of community.

     Source:  Step 2.

     D)  Amount of developable land, by community.

     Source:  updated land use map, Step 11.

     E)  Amount of land currently consumed by residential and service sector
         uses.

     Source:  updated land use map, Step 11.

     F)  Location of recent service sector development.

     Source:  discussed under Step 11.  Consult utility data, building permit
     data, and the tax assessor.

     G)  Site requirements for new housing.

     Source:  Step 13.

Technique

     Calculate a simple ratio of service sector acreage to residential acreage.
Apply this to the estimated site requirements for new housing to derive acreage
for new service sector activity.  Compare this to the available developable
land  remaining after the construction of the new residential  units.   If develop-
able land is not available, then service sector expansion in the community, in
the absence of zoning changes, is precluded.  If there is sufficient developable
land, you should consult with local zoning and planning boards, and the local
officials listed above,  to allocate this service growth.  In doing this alloca-
tion, consider carefully the pattern of recent service sector development and
the location of new housing units.  Consider also that service sector expansion
need not take place in the same community  as the new housing, especially if
another community is contiguous to the site of this housing.
                                      4-37

-------
 4.18  STEP 16:  ASSESS AIR POLLUTION IMPACTS

 Description

      The secondary air quality impacts of a new source industry are defined as
 the additional pollutant emissions that are related to residential growth needed
 to accommodate the incoming population.  This step will quantify the additional
 air pollutant emissions from:   (1) motor vehicle trips related to the new
 housing, (2) on-site fuel combustion for heating and cooling of the new housing,
 and (3) off-site fuel combustion for generating the additional electricity
 required by the new housing.  The motor vehicle emissions that are calculated
 correspond to trips for all purposes in the commutershed, including trips to
 new commercial support facilities.  However, on-site emissions for heating and
 cooling of such commercial development is ignored.  On-site fuel combustion
 emissions from new housing as well as motor vehicle emissions will generally be
 released as an area source, i.e., at a low density over a large area.  By con-
 trast, the off-site fuel combustion for generating new electricity can be
 assumed to occur at one or more of the existing generating stations in the region.
      Emissions are estimated in this step for six different pollutants related
 to the National Ambient Air Quality Standards:  sulfur oxides  (SO ), total sus-
 pended particulates (TSP), nitrogen oxides  (NO ), non-methane hydrocarbons (NMHC),
 carbon monoxide (CO), and lead  (Pb).  Emissions are not estimated for ozone  (0 )
 since this pollutant is formed in the atmosphere through a complex series of
 photochemical reactions.  Control strategies for 03 generally focus on emission
 rates for NMHC and NOX.  In urban areas, motor vehicles are the principal source
 of NMHC emissions, which are also referred to as volatile organic compounds
 (VOC).  Fuel combustion normally produces small amounts of NMHC0  Due to the fact
 that existing hydrocarbon emission factors for fuel combustion sources do not
 distinguish the methane portion, emission estimates for these sources are on the
 basis of total hydrocarbons (HC) only.
      The air pollutant emissions estimated by this analysis can be translated
 into ambient air quality levels using available computer dispersion models.  How-
 ever, due to the extensive data input requirements of such models, no attempt
 has been made to incorporate them into this analysis„  A recommended intro-
 duction to air quality modeling is EPA's Guideline publication.*
       An example of the application of this step is given in Figure 14.
 Data Output;
     A)   Total additional air pollutant emissions from motor vehicle trips
          associated with new housing, in the year of peak housing requirements.

          Units = Additional tons/year of NMHC, CO, NOX, TSP, Pb, SOX

     R)   Total additional air pollutant emissions from new housing fuel combus-
          tion, in the year of peak housing requirements.
          Units:  Additional tons/year of HC, CO, NOX, TSP, SOX
                                                               **
 EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Guideline on Air Quality Models,
2PA-450/2-78-027, Research Triangle Park, NC, 1978.

 *since Pb emissions from all types of residential fuel combustion are negligible,
PJD is not included here.
                                       4-38

-------
     C)  Total air pollutant emissions from fuel combustion for addi-
         tional electrical generation, in the year of peak housing
         requirements.

         Units:  Additional tons/year of HC, CO, NOx, TSP, Pb, SO

Data Input:

     A)  Total number of additional new housing units, by type, needed
         in the year of peak housing requirements to accommodate in-
         creased population from the construction and operation of the
         new source industry.  Housing units should be classified as
         single family (H )  or multiple family  (H ).  The year of peak
         housing requirements is determined by examining the time pe-
         riod comprising the first ten years of construction and operation.

     Source:  Previous analysis by reviewer—Step 12.

     B)  Average trip lengths for work trips (L ) and other trips (L )
         in miles.  L  can be estimated as the distance (by road)from
         the centroid of new housing units to the new source industry.
         L  can be estimated as the distance (by road) from the cen-
         troid of new housing units to the nearest central business
         district.

     Source:  Local transportation planning agency.

     C)  Residential trip generation rates for trips from single fa-
         mily development to work (T  )  and other destinations (T  ),
         and from multiple family dwellings to work (T  )  and other
                                                      ITIV7
         destinations (T  ).  A trip generation rate is defined as
         the 24-hour estimate of one-way vehicle trips to and from a
         dwelling unit.  Default values, based on nationwide statis-
         tics, are T  « 1.8, T  » 9.0, T  » 1.0, T  » 5.O.*
                    sw        so        mw        mo
     Source:  Local transportation planning agency

     D)   The fraction of all new housing units using various fuels for space
          heating:

               electricity (SH )
               gas (SH )       8
               oil (Shg)
                      o

          for domestic hot water:

               electricity (HW )
               gas (HW )       e
               oil (HWg)
                      o
*Guldberg,  p.  and D'Agostino, R., Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects,
 Volume TT_. EPA-450/3-78-014b, Research Triangle Park, NC, 1978.
                                        4-39

-------
         for cooling and clothes drying:

              electricity (CC )
              gas (CCg)

         and for central air conditioning:

              electricity (AC )
              gas (AC )       &
              oil (ACg).
                     o
         A fraction is defined as a number between 0,0 and 1.0.  Frac-
         tions for a given purpose should sum to 1.0;   e.g., SHe+ SHg+
         SHo= 1.0.   The only exception is central air conditioning
         which may not be present in all new housing units.   In this
         case, ACe, AC , and AC  should sum to the fraction of new
         housing units with central air conditioning.

     Source:  Local planning board, developers, building inspectors,
     or real estate agents.

     E)   The fraction of current electrical generation at power plants
         in the region produced by various fuels:

              coal (EG )
              oil (EG f
              gas (EG )
              nuclear and hydroelectric (EG ).

         For regions where coal is burned, the average percent sulfur
         (Sc> and ash (A )  in the coal by weight is required.  For re-
         gions where oil is burned, the average percent sulfur (S ) in
         the oil by weight is needed.  For regions where air pollution
         control equipment is operating at electrical power plants, the
         average fraction of sulfur oxides (R ) and particulates (R)
         removed from boiler flue gas should be obtained.

     Source:  Local utility company, or state air pollution control
     agency.

Techniques  (A sample application of this  technique is given in Figure 14.)

     (A)   Motor Vehicle Emissions

          Motor vehicle emissions are estimated using a simple trans-
          portation model with composite emission factors contained
          in EPA technical publications and generated by the EPA
                                          4-40

-------
          computer model MOB I LEI.*

          Input to the MOBILE1 calculations were representative nationwide data
          for the mix of motor vehicles by type, the distribution of the vehicle
          population by age/ and the mix of cold start, hot start, and hot sta-
          bilized conditions in the vehicle population.  Also input were an an-
          nual average ambient temperature of 60°P and an average vehicle speed
          of 30 mph, chosen to represent a mix of urban, suburban, and highway
          driving.  The model output is shown in Appendix 1-D and can be used
          to obtain NMHC, CO and NOX emission factors for a local mix of motor
          vehicle types, if desired.  Changes in the other input parameers, in-
          cluding credits for inspection and maintenance programs , necessitate
          a re-execution of the MOBILEl model.   Calculation of TSP, Pb, and
          SO  emission factors is outlined in Appendix 1-E.  The composite
          emission factors (EF^^)  suggested for use in this technique are sum-
          marized in Tables 9 through 11 by pollutant (i) ., calendar year (j)
          and region of the country (k) :

          •    Low altitude region

          •    California

          •    High-altitude regions (over 4,000' above MSL) .

          Total additional air pollutant emissions from motor vehicle trips
          associated with new housing can be calculated as follows:

               NMHC (tons/year)   »  1.1 x 10~6  (MILES x EF, .. )
                 CO (tons/year)   =  1.1 x 10~6 (MILES  x EF. .. )
                NO  (tons/year)   =  1.1 x 10~6 (MILES  x EF. ..)
                  *t                                       ^ J JV

                TSP (tons/year)   =•  1.1 x 10~6 (MILES  x EF. .. )
                                                          1} K

                 Pb (tons/year)   »  1.1 x 10"12(MILES  x EF...)
                                                          1JK
*EPA Office of Transportation and Land Use Policy, Mobile Source Emission Factors,
 EPA-400/9-78-005, Washington, D.C., 1978.

 EPA Office of Air, Noise, and Radiation, User's Guide to MOBILEl;  Mobile Source
 Emissions Model, EPA-400/9-78-007, Washington, D.C., 1978.  Mobile2, the suc-
 cessor to MOBILEl, has been under development for some time.  It will not be
 available for use until Spring, 1981 at the earliest, at which point it will be
 distributed through the National Technical Information Service.

 EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Compilation of Air Pollutant
 Emission Factors;  Publication No. AP-42, Third Edition, including Supplements
 1-10, Research Triangle Park, NC, 1980.

 Caiazza, R. et. al, User's Manual for the Lead Line Source Model (PBLSQ), Draft
 EPA Publication, Research Triangle Park, N.C., 1979.
                                      4-41

-------
TABLE 9
Composite Motor Vehicle Emission
Rates for Low Altitude Regions
Calendar
Year
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
*Units are
NMHC
4.8
4.2
3.7
3.2
2.8
2.4
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
in micrograms
CO
44.3
40.7
37.3
33.7
30.2
27.2
24.5
22.3
20.5
19.1
18.1
17.3
16.7
16.2
15.9
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
15.6
Emission Rate
NOX
4.0
3.8
3.5
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.7
2.5
2.4
2.4
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
of lead per vehicle
(grams/mile)
TSP
0.34
0.34
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
mile.
PB*
7300
6800
4700
3000
2300
1600
1400
1200
950
350
440
440
440
440
440
420
420
420
420
420

SOX
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23

4-42

-------
                                   TABLE  10

                       Composite  Motor Vehicle Emission
                             Rates for California
Calendar
Year
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
NMHC
4.5
3.9
3.4
2.9
2.5
2.2
2.0
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
1.4
Emission Rate (grams/mile)
CO NOX TSP PB*
38.1
35.0
32.1
29.3
26.6
24.3
22.5
21.0
19.9
19.0
18.3
17.8
17.3
17.0
16.7
16.5
16.5
16.5
16.5
16.5
3.4
3.2
3.0
2.8
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
2.1
0.34
0.34
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
* «
7300
6800
4700
3000
2300
1600
1400
1200
" 950
850
440
440
440
440
440
420
420
420
420
420
SOX
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
''Units are in micro-grams  of lead per vehicle mile
                                      4-43

-------
                                  TABLE  11

                     Composite Motor Vehicle Emission
                     Rates for High Altitude Regions
Calendar
Year
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
NMHC
6.3
5.5
4.7
4.1
3.5
3.0
2.6
2.3
2.1
1.9
1.8
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
Emission Rate
CO NOX
65.5
59.0
53.0
47.0
40.9
35.6
31.1
27.4
24.4
22.0
20.2
18.9
17.9
17.2
16.6
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
16.2
3.0
2.9
2.7
2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.3
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
2.2
(grains /mile)
TSP PB*
0.34
0.34
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
0.33
73001
6800
4700
3000
2300
1600
1400
1200
950
850
440
440
440
440
420
420
420
420
420
420
SOX
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
0.23
Units are in  micrograms of lead per vehicle mile.
                                    4-44

-------
                SO   (tons/year)  -   1.1  x  10~6  (MILES  x EF..  )
                 x                                        ijk
              where:

              MILES  (trip miles
                     per year   =   365  (L  (H T   + H  T  )
                                         w s sw    m mw

                                    + L  (H T   + H  T  ))
                                      o    s so    m  mo


                   i  =  pollutant  for which emissions are being calculated

                   j  =  year of peak housing requirements

                   k  =  region of  the country in which the new source
                         industry is to be located

    B)   New Housing Emissions

         On-site residential emissions are estimated with land-use based
         emissions factors* developed for energy use at single-family and
         multiple-family dwellings.  Data required to use these factors are
         estimates of heating degree days  (HDD)  and air conditioner compressor
         operating hours (ACH)  for new homes locating in the region of the new
         source industry.  Values for these two parameters should be read off
         of Figures  12  and  13.  Total additional air pollutant emissions from
         new housing fuel combustion can be estimated as follows:


         HC (tons/year)   =  0.0005  (H (2.0 x ID'1* HDD x SH  + 2.4 x 10'1 HW
                                     s                    g                g
                                      +8.8 x 10-z CC        + 1.4 x 10"1* ACH x AC
                                                    g                            g
                                      +6.6 x IQ-* HDD x SH  + 7.5 x 10'1 HW )
                                                          o                o
                                   +H (9.7 x 10~5 HDD x SH  + 1.9 x KT1 HW
                                     m                    g                g
                                      +9.6 x 10~2 CC        + 1.3 X lO'4 ACH x AC
                                                    g                            g
                                      +  3.4 x 10"1* HDD x SH + 6.0 x 10"l HW
                                                           o               o
                                      +  1.3 X 10~4 ACH X AC ))
                                                           o


         CO (tons/year)   -   0.0005  (H (5.1 x 10'^ HDD x SH  + 6.0 x 10"1 HW
                                                i          g            ,    g
                                      +2.2  x lO'1 CC        + 3.5 x 10~U ACH x AC
                                                *   g                            g
                                      +1.1  x 10~d HDD x SH  + 1.2 HW )
                                                          o         o
                                   +H (2.4  x 10"1* HDD x SH  + 4.8 x 10~l HW
                                     m                    g                g
*Guldberg, P. and D'Agostino, R., Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects,
Volume II, EPA-450/3-78-014bf Research Triangle Park, NC, 1978.  These  factors
assume average dwelling unit floor areas of 1600 square feet  (single family) and
900 square feet (multiple family).  In addition, the sulfur content of  distillate
fuel oil is assumed to be 0.3% by weight.
                                      4-45

-------
r	r . <.\. \
       Figure 12.  Normal seasonal heating degree  days  (base 65 F)  1941-1970.

-------
Figure 1 3.   Annual air conditioner compressor operating hours for residential structures.

-------
                                        +2.4  x 10"1 CC        + 1.2  x 10~4 ACH x AC


                                        +5.7  x I0~k HDD x SH  + 1.0  HW
                                                            O         O

                                        +2.2  x 10"^ ACH x AC ))
                                                            o




          NO  (tons/year)  =   0.0005  (H  (2.6  x 10"3 HDD x SH  + 3.0  HW
            x                         s                    g         g

                                        +1.1  CC               + 1.8  x 10"3 ACH x AC
                                               9                                    g

                                        +2,6  x 10"J HDD x SH  + 3.0  HW )
                                                            o         o

                                    +H_(1.2  x 10"3 HDD x SH  + 2.4  HW
                                                            g         g

                                        +1.2  CC               + 6.2  x 10"4 ACH x AC
                                               9                                    g

                                        +1.4  X 10" 3 HDD X SH  + 2.4  HW


                                        +5.3  x 10"^ ACH x AC ))
                                                            o




          TSP(tons/year)  =   0.0005 (Hg(2.6  x 10"4  HDD x SH  +  3.0  x 10"1  HW


                                        +1.1  X 10-1  CC         +  1.8  x 10-4  ACH X  AC
                                                     g                            g

                                        +2.2  x 10-3  HDD X SH  +  2.5  HW )
                                                            o         o

                                    +H_(1.2  x 10"^  HDD x SH  +  2.4  x 10"1  HW
                                      m                    g               g

                                        +1.2  x 10-!  CC         +  6.2  x 10-5  ACH x  AC

                                                  .   g                            9
                                        +1.1  X 10~3  HDD x SH  +  2.0  HW
                                                            o         o

                                        +4.5  x 10"4  ACH x AC ))
                                                            o




          SO^(tons/year)  =   0.0005 (Hs(1.5  x 1Q-5  HDD x SH  +  1.8  x 10"2  HW


                                        +6.6  x 10~3  CC         +  1.1  x 10"5  ACH x  AC


                                        +9.6  x ID"3  HDD x SH  +  11.0  HW )
                                                            o         o

                                    +Hffl(7.3  x 10"6  HDD x SH  +  1.4  x 10"2  HW


                                        +7.2  x 10-3  CC         +  3.7  x ID"6  ACH x  AC


                                        +5.1  X 10-3  HDD x SH  +  8.7 HW
                                                            o         o

                                       +6.4 x  10"3 ACH x AC  ))
                                                           o
      C)  Power Plant Emissions



          Off-site emissions related to additional electrical generation require

          two calculations.  First, the additional electrical load  (kwh/year)

          is estimated with land-use based emission factors*, and second this
*Guldberg, p. and D'Agostino, R., Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects,

Volume II. EPA-450/3-78-014b, Research Triangle Park, NC, 1978.
                                      4-48

-------
         electrical demand is translated into stationary source emissions usinq

         EPA's AP-42 emission factors*  and some representative assumptions,**

         The additional electricity demanded by new housing can be calculated

         as follows:



         KWH(kwh/year)  =  H (3.8 HDD x SH  + 4.7 ACH x AC
                            S             S               Q

                             +1.4 x 104 HW  + 3.5 x 103 CC



                             + 7.9 x 103)


                          +H (1.3 HDD X SH  + 1.5 ACH X AC
                            me               e

                             +1.1 x iOk HW  + 3.8 x 103 CC
                                          e               e

                             +4.4 x 10 3)




         Off-site power plant emissions related to generating this additional

         power can be calculated as follows:
         HC  (tons/year)  =  0.0005 KWH  (1.2 x lO'4 EG
                                                     c

                                       +1.6 x 10~k EG
                                                     o

                                       +1.2 X lO-5 EG )
                                                     g
         CO  (tons/year)  =  0.0005 KWH  (4.0 x IQ-^ EG


                                       +2.4 x 10-1* EG
                                                     o

                                       +2.0 x 10-1* EG )
                                                     g




        NO  (tons/year)  »  0.0005 KWH  (2.2 x 10-2 EG
          X                                         C

                                      +8.3 X ID"3 EG
                                                    o

                                      +8.3 X 10-3 EG )
                                                    g




        TSP (tons/year)  =  0.0005 KWH  (1.0-R ) (5.23 X 10~3 A  x EG
                                            pec


                                              +6.34 x lO-^ EG
                                                             o

                                              +1.19 X 10-1* EG )
                                                             g
 *EPA Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Compilation of Air Pollu-

tant Emission Factors, Third Edition, Supplements 1-10, Publication No. AP-42,

Research Triangle Park, NC, 1980.



**Overall power plant efficiency is assumed to be 33.3% and 31.6% respectively,

for coal and oil/gas-fired plants.  A transmission loss of 10% is also assumed.
                                          4-49

-------
Pb (tons/year)  =  0.0005 KWH  (5.4 x  10"6  EG
                                            c

                              +3.4 x  Kr 7  EG  )
                                            o
SO (tons/year)  =  0.0005 KWH  (1.0-R  )(1.5  x  10-2  S   x EG
  x                                 sec

                                      +1.3  x  10-2  S   x EG
                                                   o      o

                                      +7.1  x  10-6  EG  )
                                                    g
                                4-50

-------
j          Suppose  a  new  source  industry  is planned for  the  region  near  Boston,
     Massachusetts and the  total  number  of additional housing units  needed is:
          •   Single  family,  HS  = 200  units
          •   Multiple family, Hm  = 300 units
     The year of peak housing requirements is  determined  to be 1985.  Average trip
     lengths  are estimated  as:
          •    Work  trips,  L   =8 miles
          •    Other trips,  L   =  12  miles
     As the local  transportation  agency  has no data on  trip generation  rates, the
     default  values  are  used.   The fraction of new housing  units using  various  fuels
     is projected  to be:
          •    Space heating, SH   = 0.10, SH   = 0.20, SH  * Q.70
              Domestic  hot  water, HW  = 0.50, HW  = 0.20,  HW  =0.30
                                    ego
              Cooking and  clothes drying, CC   = 0080,  CC  =0.20
              Central air  conditioning, AC  = 0.20, AC  =  0.05, AC  =0
     The fraction  of current electrical  generation produced by various  fuels is:
          •    Coal, EG   =  0
          •    Oil,  EG    =  0.70, S   = 1.0%
                     o             o
          •    Gas,  EG    =»  0
                     9
          •    Nuclear & Hydroelectric,  EGn =0.30
     And the  average fraction of  pollutants removed from  flue gas  are:
          •    Sulfur, R   = 0
                        s
          •    Particulates, R    = 0.90
          Motor vehicle  emissions are  estimated for a low altitude region in 1985.
     The additional  trip miles  per year  are:
          MILES  »  365  (8.0 (200 x 1.8  + 300  x 1.0)
                        + 12 (200 x 9.0  4- 300  x 5.0))
                =  1.6  x 107 miles
        Figure 14.  Example of the Application of Step 16,  "Assess Air Pollution
                    Impacts"
                                         4-51

-------
       Figure 14.  continued
     Total additional motor vehicle  air pollutant emissions  are:
          NMHC  =  1.1 x  10"5  (1.6 x 107   x 2.4)   =   42  tons/year
          CO    =  1.1 x  1CT6  (1.6 x 107   x 27.2)  =  480  tons/year
          NO    =  1.1 x  1CT6  (1.6 x 107   x 3.0)   =   53  tons/year
            X
          TSP   =  1.1 x  10~5  (1.6 x 107   x 0.33)   =  5.R  tons/year
          Pb    =  1,1 x  10~12(1.6 x 107   x 1600)   =  0,028 tons/year
          SOV   =  1.1 x  10"6  (1.6 x 107   x 0.23)   =  4.0  tons/year
            X

     New housing emissions are based on an annual  heating degree  day value  of
HDD = 6000 and an air conditioner operating value  of  ACH  = 400 hours.  Total
additional air pollutant  emissions are:

     HC  -  OoOOOS (200(2.0 x 10~4 x 6000  x 0.20  + 2.4 x  10"1 x 0.20
                       +8.8 x 10"2 x 0.20         + 1.4 x  10"1* x 400  x 0.05
                       +6.6 x 10"14 x 6000  x 0.70  + 7.5 x  10~l x 0.30)
                   +300(9.7 x 10~5 x 6000  x 0020 + 1.9 x  10~ ! x 0020
                       +9.6 x 10"2 x 0020        + 1.3 x  lO'^ x 400  x 0.05
                       +3.4 x 10"4 x 6000  x 0.70 + 6.0 x  10~ l x 0.30))
         =  0.60 tons/year

     CO  -  0.0005 (200(5.1 x lO'4 x 6000  x 0.20 + 6.0 x  10" l x 0*20
                       +2.2 x 10"1 x 0.20        + 3.5 x  10~ 4 x 400  x 0.05
                       +1.1 x 10~3 x 6000  x 0.70 + 1.2 x  0.30)
                   +300(2.4 x 10"4 x 6000  x 0.20 + 4.8 x  10~l x 0.20
                       +2.4 x 10"1 x 0.20        + 1.2 x  10"  x 400  x 0.05
                       +507 x 10"4 x 6000  x 0.70 + 1.0 x  0.30))
         »  1.0 tons/year

     NO  -  0.0005 (200(2.6 x 10"3 x 6000  x 0.20 + 3.0 x  0.20
                                                           - 3
                       +1.1 x 0.20               + 1.8 x  10   x 400  x 0.05
                       +2.6 x 10"3 x 6000  x 0.70 + 3.0 x  0.30)
                   +300(1.2 x 10~ 3 x 6000  x 0.20 + 2.4 x  0.20
                       +lo2 x 0.20               + 6.2 x  10~  x 400  x 0.05
                       +1.4 x 10" 3 x 6000  x 0.70 + 2.4 x  0.30))
          =  2.9 tons/year
                                         4-52

-------
  Figure 14.  continued
                                  -k                         -1
     TSP  =  OoOOOS  (200(2.6 x  10    x  6000  x  0.20  +  3.0 X 10   x 0.20
                                  -1                         -k
                        +1.1 x  10    x  0020         +  1.8 x 10   x 400  x 0.05
                                  -3
                        •(•2.2 x  10    x  6000  x  0»70  +  2.5 x 0.30)
                                  -<+                         -1
                    +300(1.2 x  10    x  6000  x  0.20  +  2.4 x 10   x 0.20
                                  -1                         -5
                        +1.2 x  10    x  0,20         +  6.2 x 10   x 400  x 0.05
                                  -3
                        +1.1 x  10    x  6000  x  0.70  +  2.0 x 0.30)
          =  1.9 tons/year
     SO   =  0.0005  (200(1.5 x 10~5 x 6000 x 0.20 + 1.8 x 10~2 x 0.20
       X
                        +6.6 x 10~3 x 0.20        + 1.1 x 10-5 x 400 x 0.05
                        +9.6 x lO-3 x 6000 x 0.70 + 1.1.0 x 0.30)
                    +300(7.3 x 10~6 x 6000 x 0.20 + 1.4 x 10~2 x 0.20
                        +7.2 x lO-3 x 0.20        + 3.7 x 10~6 x 400 x 0.05
                        +5.1 x ID"3 x 6000 x 0.70 + 8.7 x 0.30))
          =  8.0 tons/year
     Power plant emissions related to additional electrical generation are based
on the following electrical load:
     KWH  =  200(3.8 x 6000 x 0.10 + 4.7 x 400 x 0.20
                +1.4 x 101*  x 0.50 + 3.5 x 103 x 0.80
                +7.9 x 103)
            +300(1.3 x 6000 x 0.10 + 1.5 x 400 x 0.20
                +1.1 x 10^  x 0.50 + 3.8 x 103 x 0.80
                +4.4 x 103)
          =  8.2 x 106 kwh/year

Total additional power plant emissions are:
     HC
     CO
     NO
       x
     TSP
     Pb
     SO
0.0005 x 8.2 x 106 (1.6 x 10'^ x 0.70)  »  0.46 tons/year
0.0005 x 8.2 x 106 (2.4 x I0~k x 0.70)  -  0.69 tons/year
0.0005 x 8.2 x 106 (8.3 x 10*"3 x 0.70)  •  24 tons/year
0.0005 x 8.2 x 106 (1.0 - 0.9) (6.34 x lO"1* x 0.70)  =  0.18 tons/year
0.0005 x 8.2 x 106 (3.4 x 10~7 x 0.70)  »  0.00098 tons/year
0.0005 x 8.2 x 10s (1.0 - 0) (1.3 x KT2 x 1.0 x 0.70)  -  37 tons/year
                                      4-53

-------
       Figure 14. continued
     In summary/ the total secondary air pollutant emissions  (in tons/year)
related to the assumed new source industry are;
NMHC

42
-
-
HC

-
0.60
0.46
CO

480
1.0
0.69
NO
X
53
2.9
24
TSP

5.8
1.9
0.18
Pb

0.028
0
0.00098
SO
X
4.0
8.0
37
Motor Vehicle

Housing

Power Plant

Total             42*    1.1*      482      80      7.9     0.029      49
*NMHC emissions are for mobile sources only.  Total HC emissions are for
stationary sources only.
                                      4-54

-------
4.19  STEP  17:  ASSESS  IMPACTS FROM  STORMWATER RUNOFF

Description

     This section is concerned with the stormwater pollution loads that may result
from new development associated with the location of a new industry.  The dis-
cussion is  limited to stormwater runoff; the water quality issues associated with
increased flows to municipal wastewater treatment plants are not considered here.
A discussion of increased wastewater flows to wastewater treatment plants is, how-
ever, included as an infrastructure demand in Section 4.160

     New development will typically affect both the quantity and quality of surface
runoff.  By altering surface runoff patterns, particularly the amount of impervious-
ness (i.e., streets, sidewalks, parking lots, etc.), development will generally
increase the volume of rainfall available to runoff.  This becomes a fundamental
issue, of course, for designing adequate drainage systems for new development.
Also important, however, are the potential downstream short-term flooding effects
of the increased runoff.   Figure 15 shows typical  effects of urbanization on
runoff.

     The runoff will contain a number of pollutants that have accumulated in the
drainage area.  Typically, impervious surfaces will accumulate more pollutants
than areas  that remain undisturbed.  Thus, stormwater runoff will carry pollutant
loads that will vary according to the amount of imperviousness created by the
development.  The development itself increases the rate of disposition of pollu-
tants, through mechanisms such as road salting, erosion of pavement, spills,
litter, or construction activities.   Table 12 illustrates magnitude of changes--
both quantity and quality—in an example 470-acre watershed.

     Accurately predicting quantity and quality effects for new development can
be complicated and time-consuming.  In particular, there are a number of data-
intensive models that have been developed for predicting stormwater pollutant
loads.  These are not discussed here because they are beyond the scope of review
considered appropriate for this guidebook.*  The techniques used in this guide-
book are generally appropriate for order of magnitude calculations for small to
large watersheds.  These techniques are not adequate, for instance, in looking
at the effects of a shopping center.  There is also no attempt in this section to
analyze in-stream effects — either flooding or water quality.  The guidebook user
faces a far more complicated task in estimating actual water quality effects.  The
user should consult the Areawide Assessment Procedures Manual for a discussion of
techniques.
      An  example  of the  application of  this step is given in Figure 17.

Data Output
     A)  Mean runoff flows in a given drainage area where development impacts
        ' are being considered.

         Units * cubic feet per second (cfs)

     B)  Mean runoff pollutant load for a given drainage area for a given storm
         event where development  impacts  are being considered.
 For a discussion of more sophisticated and complex techniques, see U.S. EPA
Areawide Assessment Procedures Manual, Washington, D.C., EPA 600/9-76-014, July,
1976.
                                        4-55

-------
                                     Urban
       M-l
       0
       
-------
                              TABLE 12

            EFFECT OF CHANGING LAND USE ON STORM RUNOFF
                       FROM 470 ACRE SUBAREA
                                    Annual              Annual
                                    Runoff             BOD Load
       Land Use                     (inches)             (pounds)


       100% Open '                    8,34                5.70

        67% Single-Family
        33% Multi-Family            11.72               23.40
Source:  Roesner, Larry, A.  "A Storage, Treatment, Overflow, and Runoff
Model for Metropolitan Masterplanning" in Short Course Proceedings;
Applications of Stormwater Management Models * 1976. Cincinnati: EPA 600/2-
77-065, March 1977, p. 316.
                                4-57

-------
          Units - Ib/day of the following pollutants:

                 Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD_)
                 Suspended Solids (S3)
                 Volatile Solids (VS)
                 Total Phosphorus (PO.)
                 Total Nitrogen (N).

Data Input

     A)    Area in acres of the drainage area being considered

     Source:  from previous steps.

     B)    Mean rainfall intensity for an average storm in the drainage area.

     Source:  local weather station;  or 208 planning agency that has done
     rainfall analysis in connection with its own urban stormwater analysis.

     C)    Percent impervious area in the drainage area being considered.

     Source:  from projected land use from previous steps.  Percent impervious
     will vary by the type of land use.  The user can use aerial photographs
     of similar existing development to calculate this or can use the general
     guide given below:


            Land Use Category               Percent Impervious Area

          Residential
            Low Density (1-4 units/acre)              20
            Medium Density (5-10 units/acre)          40
            High Density (11+ units/acre)             60

          Commercial                                 80
          Industrial                                 70
          Institutional, Public                      30

          Open, Undeveloped                          0

      The percent impervious area for the entire drainage area is calculated
      by taking a weighted average for the drainage area.  For example,
      assume an area has the following land use characteristics:

           Low density residential               40%
           Medium density residential            20%
           High density residential               0
           Commercial                            10%
           Industrial                             0
           Institutional/public                   5%
           Open, Undeveloped                     25%

                                                100%
                                          4-58

-------
          The overall percent impervious area would be

              = (.40) •  (20) +  (.20) •  (40) + (0) + (.10)  •  (80) +  (0) +
                (.5) •  (30) + (.25) •  (0)

              = 39%.

     D)   Runoff coefficient value  for  the drainage area.

     Source:  Figure 11 and percent impervious area from C).

     E)   Land use cover in the drainage area in acres using  the follow-
          ing categories:  residential, commercial, industrial, other
          developed areas.

     Source:  from Step 11, updated land use map.

     F)   Population density in people  per acre.

     Source:  from information developed in Steps 2 and  3.

Techniques

     An example of the application  of these techniques is  given in  Figure  17.

I.   Quantity

     Mean runoff flow can  be estimated  by  using  the rational formula:

         QR = Cv IA                                      (1)

where:

         QR = mean runoff  flow  (cfs)
         Cv = average runoff coefficient
         I  = mean rainfall intensity  (in/hr)
         A  = drainage  area  (acres)

As discussed above, Cv   as shown  in Figure 16 is calculated as a  function of
average imperviousness  of  the drainage  area.

 II,  Quality

     Mean runoff pollutant loadings are calculated by the  following equation:

         WR • 5.4 • c QR                                 (2)

where:

         WR = mean runoff  loading rate  (Ibs/day)
         is  = mean pollutant concentration
         QR » mean runoff  flow  (cfs).
         5.4 - conversion figure (lb/day/cfs-mg/1)
QR is obtained from the calculation above using  equation (1).  In order to obtain
c~, the following equation  is used:

         c-  = a (i, j) • p(PD)                            (3)

                                         4-59

-------
                           LIMIT OF RUNOFF COEFFICIENT
                   TIGHT SOIL OR STEEP LAND
                                                    ''STORM MODEL EQUATION
                                                                  (24,25)
                                       LOOSE SOILS OR FLAT LAND (22)
                                       100% OPEN; TIGHT SOILS OR STEEP LAND

                                       IOO% OPENiLOOSE SOILS OR FLAT LAND
                                3O    40    50   SO    70    80

                               PERCENT IMPERVIOUS AREA
90    IOO
FIGURE'16.   RUNOFF COEFFICIENT DETERMINATION FROM  LAND COVER INFORMATION.
                                        4-60

-------
where:
         c~ = concentration of pollutant  (j)  from  land  use (i)  in (mg/1)
         a(i,j) = constant for pollutant  (j)  and  land  use (i)  in (mg/1)
         p(PD) = population  function.
The land use categories and  pollutants are  shown  below:
                             LAND USE AND  POLLUTANTS
                                                         Pollutants
    Land Uses
1=1  Residential
i=2  Commercial
i=3  Industrial
i=4  Other Developed Areas
                                                   j  = 1  BOD ,  Total
                                                   j  = 2  Suspended Solids (SS)
                                                   j  = 3  Volatile Solids, Total (VS)
                                                   j  = 4  Total  P04 (as PO4)
                                                   j  = 5  Total  N (as N)'
The a(i,j) can be calculated from the  following  conversion:
         a(i,j) = (a(i,j)  • F)/Cv(i)                     (4)
where:
         F = 4.42, a constant  (mg/l)/(16/acre-in)
         Cv(i) = runoff coefficient  for  land  use (i)
Cv(i) is estimated according to the  procedures described above.   The values for
a are shown in Table 13 below:
                                    TABLE 13
         Land Use
     i=l  Residential  (a)
     i=2  Commercial   (a)
     i=3  Industrial   (a)
                                     FACTORS
                                  BOD 5
                                  Cjr.ll

                                 0.799
                                 3.20
                                 1.21
                                             (*)
                                                   pollutant
                                                                PO,
     i=4  Other Developed Areas  (a)   0.113
* units are lb/acre-*in.
        VS     '4      N
       (j-3)  (j-4)   (j-5)
16.3    9.45  0.0336  0.131
22.2   14.0   0.0757  0.206
29.1   14.3   0.0705  0.277
 2.70   2.6   0.00994 0.0605
                                     4-61

-------
For the purposes of this section, we have used average C'v(i) values:
     for i = 1  (Residential),  Cv(l) = .30
         i = 2  (Commercial),  Cv(2) = .70
         i = 3  (Industrial),  Cv(3) = .60
         i = 4  (Other Developed),  Cv(4)  = .10
Table  14 lists  the  converted "a"  factor  to be used in equation (3).   You may
adjust the  "a"  factor according  to equation  (4)  if you feel that a different
runoff coefficient  (C )  is  more  appropriate  for  a particular land use in the
drainage area.
     In order to estimate the population function, p(PD), the  following  equations
are used:
                                                        0.54
     for i = 1  (Residential): p(PD) - 0.142 + 0.218  (PD)             (5)
         i = 2 or 3 (Commercial or Industrial): p(PD) = 1.0          (6)
         i = 4  (Other Developed Areas): p(PD) = 0.142                (7)
where:
         PD = population density in people/acres.
                                          4-62

-------
Assume the following data  inputs:

     A)  Area =  50 acres

     B)  Mean rainfall  intensity  for  an  average  storm = 0.055 in/hr

     C), D), E)  Land use  and Cv  values  (from Table  14)

         Residential =  20  acres;  .30

         Commercial = 4 acres;  .70

         Industrial = 0 acres

         Other Developed = 4 acres; .10

         Open, Undeveloped = 22 acres; 0

     F)  Population density = 20  people/acre.

Also assume that we are only interested  in BODs  loading values.

     First, calculate c" values  for each  land  use type in the  drainage area
using equation (3).  To do this,  p(PD) values  are calculated  from equations
(5) , (6) , and (7) .

     Residential:  p(PD)1  =  (0.142 +  0.218  (20)°*54)

                   = 1.42

     Commercial:   p(PD>2  =  (1)

                   = 1.0

     Other:  p(PD)4 - (.142)

             • .142

Next, calculate the c" values for  each land use type  using the above results and
Table 14.

     Residential: c^ -  (11.8) (1.24)  - 14.6 mg/1

     Commercial:  V  =  (20.2) (1) =20.2 mg/1

     Other: c~4 - (5.0)   (.142) - .7 mg/1

Second, estimate W  for each of the land use types.   This first  requires  that
QR be calculated for each  land use type of equation  QR = C IA.

     Residential:  Q^ - (.30)-(.055  in.hr)-(20  acres)•(1 cfs/(acre-in/hr))

                       = .33 cfs
    Figure 17.  Bcample of the Application oif Step 17, "Assess Impacts Fran
                Stormwater Runo£f

                                          4-63

-------
    Figure 17. cont.
     Commercial: QR2 =*  (.70)-(.055 in/hr)•(4)•(lcfs/(acre-in/hr))

                     =  .15 cfs

     Other: QR4 =  (.10)  (.055 in/hr)•(4)•(Icfs/(acre-in/hr))

                =  .02 cfs.

Now, calculate WR  for land use type, using

     WR = 5.4 • c-QR

     Residential: W^ =  (5.4 lb/day/cfs-mg/1)•(14.6 mg/l)-(.33 cfs)

                      = 26 Ib/day BOD5

     Commercial: WR2 =»  (5.4 lb/day/cfs-mg/1)•(20.2)•(.15 cfs)

                     =16.3 Ib/day BOD5

     Other:  WR4 =  (5.4 lb/day/cfs-mg/1)•(.7 mg/l)-(.02)

                 =  .07 Ib/day BODs

     WR Total "  WR1 + WR2 + WR4

              = 26 + 16.3 +  .07

              - 42.37 Ib/day BOD_

This represents the BODs loads for an average  storm event.  The  value  is, of
course, only useful for this type of screening exercise or  where one alternative
land use effect is being compared with another one.   The vlaue does not take  into
account site-specific factors as slope and storage.
                                    4-64

-------
                              TABLE 14




                    "a" FACTORS* FOR GIVEN Cv(i)
Pollutant
Land Use
i=l Residential (a)
i=2 Commercial (a)
i=3 Industrial (a)
i=4 Other Developed Areas (a)
Cy(J)
0,30
0.70
0.60
0.10
BOD5
11.8
20.2
8.9
i
5.0
SS
(j=2)
240
140
214
119
VS
(j=3)
139
88
105
115
P°4
(j=4)
0.50
0.48
0.52
0.44
N
(j=5)
1.9
1.9
2.0
2.7
*units are in mg/l,
                                4-65

-------
4020  STEP 18:  ASSESS NOISE IMPACTS

Description

     This category is generally most significant as a primary impact resulting
from construction or operation of the facility and associated transportation
infrastructure.  The quantification of noise impacts is difficult, and there-
fore a primarily qualitative approach is recommended.

Data Output

     A)  Identification of noise-sensitive areas affected by increased traffic
         attributable to the facility.

     B)  Identification of residential or service sector growth in areas with
         high ambient noise levels.

Data Input

     A)  Location of new residential development, by community.

     Source:  Step 13.

     B)  Location of new commercial development, by community.

     Source:  Step 15.

     C)  Location of noise-sensitive areas

     Source:  updated land use map, Step 11.

     D)  •  pattern of traffic in community.

         •  expansion of roads and highways necessary to accomodate
            new traffic.

     Source:  local traffic engineer or public works official

     E)  Location of facility.

     Source:  Applicant.

     F)  Location of potentially high ambient-noise level land uses.

     Source:  updated land use map, Step 11.

     G)  Location of known colocating industries.

     Source:  Step 21.

Technique

     1)  Present the traffic engineer with the overlays from Steps 13 and 15
         which identify the location of—new-housing and commercial development.
                                     4-66

-------
         Also, give the engineer the number of new housing units
         and the associated population.   Identify and point  out the
         location of known colocating industries„  Ask the engineer
         to estimate:

         •  the increase in traffic attributable to  the new  housing
            and the facility.

         •  the increase in traffic between the new housing  and
            commercial facilities.

         •  the increase in traffic between known colocating
            facilities and new housing.

         •  the expansion of roads and highways necessary to
            accommodate  the new  traffic.   Determine  as  precisely
            as possible which roads will  require expansion.

You should use this information to pinpoint noise-sensitive  areas, such as
schools, hospitals, and even private residences, which may be affected by
increased traffic.  Private residences are included here because  they may
be affected if the facility has a 3-shift work day.  At the  end of each
shift, noise levels from departing workers may be unacceptable, particularly
if these workers leave work during the night.

     Based on the overlays, you can pinpoint any residential or commercial
growth which will be located in areas with currently high ambient noise
levels.  Manufacturing and warehouse land uses, and highway/street level
uses are most likely to conflict with induced residential or commercial
growth.  If the community has a noise control official,  consult with this
individual about potential noise conflicts.

4.21   STEP 19:  ASSESS PESTICIDES  IMPACTS

Description

     There are potential conflicts between agriculture pesticide use and new
residential development.   The assessment in this step is qualitative,

Data Output

     A)  Location of potential conflicts between agricultural pesticide use
        , and new housing.

Data Input

     A)  Location of agricultural land uses.

     Sources   updated land use map, Step 11.

     B)  Location of agricultural areas with heavy pesticide use.

     Source:   local agricultural extension office (USDA)  or  state
     department of agriculture.
                                      4-67

-------
      C)  Location of new housing within  communities.

      Source:  Step  13.

 Technique

      Do this analysis only  for  communities with  new  residential  development.
 Consult with the officials  listed  above  to identify  areas  of  heavy  pesticide
 use.  Compare these areas to  the overlays showing  residential growth.   Any
 residential area adjacent to  an area of  heavy pesticide  use is at risk,  until
 mitigation measures can be  devised.  Identify the  types  of pesticides  being
 used, and the general pattern of application  (time-of-day  and frequency of
 application).

  4022 STEP 20:  ASSESS IMPACTS ON SENSITIVE AREAS

 Description

      This category  includes all legally  or scientifically  defined sensitive
 areas in any communities expected  to absorb new  housing  units.  These  areas
 include:

         wetlands
         floodplains
         coastal zones
         prime  and  unique agricultural  land
         steep slopes
         stream embankments
         historic or archaeological sites
         wildlife habitats
         alluvial valley floors
         forests or  woodlands
         sole source aquifers
         seismically active  areas
         endangered  species  habitats
         wild and scenic river
         local, state, or federal recreation area
         areas of particular scenic value.
Data Output

     A)   Identification and quantification of sensitive areas  at risk.  (See Figure  18)

Data Input

     A)   Location of new residential development.

     Source:   Step 13.

     B)   Location of new commercial development

     Source:   Step 15.

     C)   Location of known colocating industries.

     Source:   Step 21.
                                       4-68

-------
    Sensitive Area
             Contact
Wetlands and Floodplains
Coastal Zone
Prime  and Unique Agricultural Land



Steep Slopes

Stream Embankments


Historic or Archaelogical Sites
Wildlife or Endangered Species Habitats
Alluvial Valley Floors
Forests or Woodlands
Sole Source Aquifer
Environmental Office of the Fish and
Wildlife Service of the regional
office of Department of the Interior
CDOIJ .

1)  State coastal zone management
office, usually a part of the State
Office of Environmental Affairs or
Natural Resources,

2}  The Coastal Zone Information
Center or the Director of the State
Programs, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration.

State Land Use Committee Chairperson,
Soil Conservation Service, U.S.
Department of Agriculture.

U.S.G.S. topographical map.

U.S.G.S topographical map or general
site location map.

1)  Division of Cultural Resources
of the regional office of DOI.

2)  National Register of Historic
Places.

1)  Office of Endangered Species
of the Office of Federal Assistance,
Fish & Wildlife Service at the
regional office of DOI.

2)  Office of Marine Mammals and
Endangered Species of the National
Marine Fisheries Services, NOAA.

Office of Environmental Geology,
USGS.

U.S. Forest Service of the regional
office of DOI.

State Water Resources Division,
USGS.
        Figure  18  Sotraees to Contact to Identify Sensitive Areas.
                                        4-69

-------
Figu:ie 18
      Sensitive Area

Seismically Active Areas

Wild and Scenic Rivers



Local, State or Federal Recreation Area


Areas of Particular Scenic Value
       Contact

Office of Earthquake.Studies, USGS.

Heritage, Conservation, and
Recreation Service, regional office
of DOI.

National Park Service of the regional
office of DOI.

 National Park Service  of  the
 regional office  of DOI
                                           4-70

-------
     D)  Location of sensitive areas in any community expected to
         experience residential growth.

     Source:   Updated  land use map,  Step  13.   Some sensitive areas may
     have been  identified  at  Levels A  and B.

Technique

     Plot the location of  sensitive areas on an overlay.  Compare  this overlay
to those developed for Steps  13 and 15, and also compare these overlays to
the location of known colocators  (Step 21).

     1)  Any sensitive lands  adjacent to new housing, new commercial
         sector activity,  or  known colocators is assumed to be at  risk.

     2)  Land which is considered legally developable under local  zoning,
         but which is also considered sensitive, is assumed to be  at risk
         if it is located  in  the same community as new housing, new commer-
         cial activity, or a  known colocator.  This land is at risk even if
         it is not immediately adjacent to the new growth.

     3)  If growth in a community exhausts the supply of legally develop-
         able land, then  all sensitive areas in the community are assumed
         to be at risk, regardless of whether they abut the new growth.
         The results of Steps 11 and 13 will tell you whether all  develop-
         able land in a community is consumed by residential growth.

 4.23   STEP  21:   IDENTIFY KNOWN COLOCATORS

     Suppliers of raw materials, buyers of finished products, or industries
attracted by potential agglomeration economies may colocate with the new
source.  Steps 22 and 23 can  only be undertaken if you can identify specific
known colocators.  You can identify these companies by consulting  with:

     •  the applicant

     •  the local economic development agency, and chamber of commerce

     •  the local or regional planning commission.

Generally speaking, it will not be possible to identify known colocators,
given that this colocation is based upon the successful completion of the
applicant's facility, and this facility will not yet have received approval
to proceed to construction.  The adequacy of the transportation network in
the United States and in most regions of the country means that colocation
within the impact area is not a necessity for the successful operation of a
business which buys from or supplies the facility.

     In the absence of information about known colocators, do not  assume or
infer that specific industries will colocate in the impact area.   If appropri-
ate,  you may include a paragraph in the EIS which details that the location of
additional facilities in the impact area may significantly strain  the housing
                                         4-71

-------
market and available infrastructure, and may lead to additional induced growth
with potentially serious physical impacts.  Your decision to include this type
of very brief analysis will depend on the magnitude of the secondary impacts
from the facility itself.


4o24   STEP  22:   CALCULATE  THE SITE  REQUIREMENTS OF  KNOWN COLOCATORS

Description

     This analysis is undertaken only if the applicant or local officials know
of a specific company which is locating within  the impact area as a direct
result of the development or  location of the facility.

Data Output

     A)  Location of the colocating facility.

     Source:  applicant; representative of the  colocating company/-
     local economic development board; local real estate agent
     representing the colocating company.

     B)  Estimated number of  acres required by  the colocating company
         for the main facility and associated infrastructure.

     Source:  same as A).

Technique

     Collect the information  supplied by the sources listed above.  These data
are used for the noise and sensitive area evaluations (Steps 18 and 20).

 4.25   STEP 23:   CALCULATE THE INFRASTRUCTURE REQUIREMENTS OF KNOWN COLOCATORS

Description

     This analysis is done only for known colocators.  The major infrastructure
requirements of interest are:

     •  water supply
     •  energy supply
     •  solid waste collection
     •  wastewater treatment.

These infrastructure requirements represent only infrastructure essential to
construction or operation at the site of the colocator's  facility.   Infrastructure
supplied off-site to employees operating or constructing the facility is con-
sidered in Step 14.

Data Output

     A)  Additional infrastructure required to service the activities that
         occur at the facility site.
                                             4-72

-------
Data Input

     A)  Location of colocating facility.

     Source:  Step 21.

     B)  Number of employees of colocator at peak construction, and during
         stable operations, and number of operating shifts.

     Source:  Step 21.

     C)  Requirements of the facility for the services provided in the
         four infrastructure categories listed above.

     Source:  a representative of the colocating company.

     •D)  Acreage of facility.

     Source:  Step 21.

Technique

     In the absence of cooperation from representatives of the colocating
company, there are no valid standard multipliers available to quantify these
infrastructure requirements; these requirements are highly specific to the
construction and operating characteristics of the facility.

     Ask a representative of the company to identify and quantify specific
infrastructure needs in the four categories listed above.  Present these
resource estimates to the local utilities, and to local officials responsible
for solid waste, wastewater treatment, and water supply, and ask them to
identify if available reserve capacity can accommodate the company's needs.

     If the representative of the colocating company refuses to cooperate
with this analysis, consult the local officials listed above anyway.  In the
case of a substantial colocator, they should be able to estimate the require-
ments of the facility, as few companies will select a site for a facility
without checking with local officials concerning the adequacy of infrastruc-
ture.

4.26:  STEP 24:  PREPARE THE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT

     The previous 23 steps have outlined specific steps  for  the assessment  of
secondary impacts of new facilities or projects.  The results  of these assess-
ments should be incorporated into a discrete section of  the  EIS devoted  to  these
impacts.

     In preparing any portion of an Environmental Impact Statement, you  should
refer to the CEQ "Regulations for Implementing the Procedural  Provisions of
NEPA,"* and to the regulations of the lead agency responsible  for  supervising
the preparation of the statement.  Every Federal agency was  required  to  adopt
*40 CFR 1500 to 1508. .


                                           4-73

-------
appropriate procedures to supplement the CEQ regulations.  EPA promulgated its
procedures as 40 CFR 6, "Implementation of Procedures on the National Environ-
mental Policy Act," effective December 15, 1979.

     The contents of the EIS should be as follows:*

     a)  Cover sheet

     b)  Summary

     c)  Table of contents

     d)  Purpose of and need for action

     e)  Alternatives, including proposed action

     f)  Affected environment

     g)  Environmental consequences**

     h)  List of preparers

     i)  List of agencies, organizations, and persons to whom copies of
         the statement are sent

     j)  Index

     k)  Appendices (if any).

This is a standard format for EISs, which should be followed unless you deter-
mine there is a "compelling reason to do otherwise."***Consult the CEQ regula-
tions for a more detailed discussion of the contents of each of these sections.

     The section on environmental consequences should include discussions of:

     •   direct (primary)  effects and their significance

     •   indirect (secondary)  effects and their significance*

Secondary effects are the entire focus of this user manual.

     We recommend that primary and secondary impacts be treated in separate
*40 CFR 1502.10.

**See especially sections 102(2)(c)(i),  (ii),  (iv), and  (v) of the National
Environmental Policy Act.

***40 CFR 1502.10.

+40 CFR 1502.16.
                                        4-74

-------
sections of the chapter on "environmental consequences/" both because of the
very different nature of these two types of impacts, and to emphasize the po-
tential importance of secondary impacts.

     The order of exposition of the secondary impacts section of the EIS should
follow the order of the steps outlined in this chapter of the user manual.  You
should emphasize the results from each step of the analysis, rather than the
steps used to arrive at these results.

     A frequent criticism of EISs is that they are encyclopedic, and it can be
exceedingly difficult to identify the major conclusions from the analysis.  The
CEQ regulations state that

     the text of final environmental impact statements shall normally be
     no less than 150 pages and for proposals of unusual scope or com-
     plexity, shall normally be less than 300 pages.*

Therefore, although documentation of the steps you used to reach a particular
result is essential, you should severely curtail the amount of documentation in
the EIS.  This documentation should, however, be available outside of the EIS
itself for you or other individuals to reference,,
*40 CFR 1502.7.                          4.75

-------
APPENDIX I. A:  Equation for Indirect Employment and  Population  Impacts
     Both Level B and Level C require the calculation  of  the  total  direct and
indirect population and employment effects attributable to  the  location of
a facility in the impact area.  To calculate these effects, the user estimates
population and employment multipliers.  A more detailed derivation  of these
multipliers is given below.

     Let E be the increment in basic employment because of  the  new  source

                            P       S
            in general  « = — , 8 - —


     define the population and employment impacts from E  in the ith round as
     P(i) and S (i) , respectively, then
            P(2) - ccS(l) -  eegE
            S(2) = SP<2) =  («6)2E

            P(n) = a(oc0)n-lE
            S(n) - (oc6)nE

     therefore, P - P(l) + P (2) + .  .  . + P(n) +  .

            Total population,
                        z

                                      «E
                                     1 . ocf
     similarly, the total employment impact  (EI>) from the new source  is direct
     employment, E, plus indirect employment, S

     and ET = E + S(l) + S(2) + . . . + S(n) +  . . .
            » E +,<=££ + (
            » E I  ("6)1
     or,
                                  I.A-1

-------
APPENDIX  i.B:  Calculating Costs for Standard Facilities

     Costs for standard facilities may be estimated by using McGraw Hill's
Dodge Building Cost Calculator and Valuation Guide which is available in yearly
subscriptions consisting of an original guide and three quarterly updates.
Since the guide's primary goal is to estimate current costs, it is essential
that the most recent issue be used.  The costs listed in the guide are based
on actual prices for construction contracted in all regions of the United
States.  In order to arrive at estimates that are "reasonably correct," costs
at the low-to-mid range of competitive bidding are listed.  The guide excludes
any land costs, closing costs or financing charges associated with the facility.
Included, however, is a set of conditions to be considered when choosing a site
for construction.

     The guide is divided into six sections representing major classifications
of facilities:  residential, commercial and industrial, educational and religious,
public, medical, and rural.  Under each of these classifications are several
specific building types.  For example, eight types of public buildings are
listed — fire stations, municipal buildings, armories, public libraries, tele-
phone buildings, clubs, health and recreational buildings, and air terminals.
The first step in using the guide is to locate the appropriate type of building
desired.  Next, the construction method used (steel and concrete frame, masonry
wall, etc.) and quality of the building are considered.  Once these characteris-
tics are identified, a description of a model building in terms of structure,
Plumbing, heating, ventilation, air conditioning, wiring, flooring, built-in
equipment and functional areas along with pictures of representative buildings,
can be located in the guide.  Next, the gross floor area of the proposed build-
ing is calculated by estimation techniques set forth by the American Institute
of Architects.  The gross floor area is used to determine the base cost per
square foot of the proposed building,  Changes to the base cost are made if
any particular aspects of the proposed building differ from those of the model
building featured in the guide.  Base costs for any special areas not included
in the model, such as elevators and decks, are also determined.

     The final step is to arrive at an appropriate "local cost multiplier",
since the base costs per square foot were calculated for the base year of
1970.  Specific cities throughout the U.S. have multipliers for four construc-
tion methods:  steel construction,  masonry construction (including concrete),
frame construction,  and average construction, a category to be used when the
above methods are combined.  Multipliers apply to any location within a 25
mile radius of the city.  If a multiplier is needed for any area not covered
in the guide, the editors of the guide will develop one for a subscriber at
no extra charge, if supplied with basic information about the location.  Once
the multiplier has been determined, it is multiplied by the total base cost
to determine the total estimated cost of the building.
                                        I.B-1

-------
 APPENDIX I.C:  Summary of Construction Worker Case Studies

      One group of individuals that may have a strong impact on the region
 where a new source facility - particularly a large scale energy or resource
 development project - is sited is the team of construction workers.  Con-
 struction time for a major facility generally ranges from 5-15 years.  Since
 the average construction worker works on the facility for the life of the
 project, his/her presence in the community is felt for a considerable length
 of time.  Several case studies have analyzed the effects of these workers on
 affected communities in Louisiana,   Wyoming, Montana, North Dakota, Utah,
 Alaska,  Oregon, Nebraska, Washington, Idaho and Pennsylvania,   (See list of
 sources  at the end of this section.)

      The population influx attributable to construction workers who move into
 the impact area is dependent upon

      •     the percentage of workers  who have families,

      •     the proportion of workers  who bring their families to the
            impact area,

      •     the average family size  of construction workers.

 While the  findings vary,  most studies indicate that 200  to 300 people total
 will  enter  the impact area for each 100 construction workers.

      Average  family  size  for construction workers  is fairly stable  across all
 studies  we  have reviewed.   There  is some evidence  that  the family size of
 construction workers  is generally lower than the average for families already
 residing in the impact area.

      The percentage of construction workers  who  move into the  impact  area with
 their families is  dependent on the  length of the project,  feasibility of
 commuting to the  region from other  areas,  and  availability and type of housing
 in  the siting  area,   Construction workers  are  often willing  to drive  1 to l«s
 hours or 60 to 70  miles for  a one-way commute  to the  construction site.

 Housing  Impacts

     The strain on local housing  markets  is  regarded  as  one  of the  most
 serious  negative effects associated with  the population  growth which  may
 accompany a new facility.  According  to the Wyoming Department of Economic
 Planning & Development, "housing  is often the most  immediate and critical
 area associated with boomtown  impact because of  the complex process involved
 in satisfying housing requirements."*

     The key to the housing problem is the excess demand for housing  that may
be created by a population categorized as "temporary."  The fact that construc-
 tion workers are not permanent residents of the area has implications for both
     *Dept. of Economic Planning & Development, Office of the Chief of State
Planning, Housing finance: Implications for the State of Wyoming, Cheyenne,
Wyoming  (March 1977).
                                    I.C-1

-------
the price and type of housing that will be available.

     The increased demand, for housing is reflected most strongly in the
demand for single family housing.  Most construction workers prefer single
family homes, although they may  not in every case be able to afford them. As
demand increases for single-family housing, prices increase, eeteris paribus.
This price increase further prevents some workers who desire single-family
homes from purchasing them.  This situation may be worsened by the fact that
existing houses may be condemned to allow for the physical siting of the
facility and buffer zones, or may become less desirable because of proximity
to the facility.

     The provision of new housing may not occur as quickly as desired for
several reasons.  Houses built in a short period of time are generally of
a lesser quality, and many local builders are unwilling to build such "cut-
rate" homes.  Modular prefabricated houses, although a likely solution, may
be ruled out by local rules and  builder's preferences.  Financing from local
sources of funds may be difficult to obtain, or the cost of financing a home
through available funds may be prohibitive.*  Due to the fact that large-scale
industrial plants are often sited in areas remote from any large population
center, the supply of houses may already be tight; in rural areas, little
speculative building occurs, and houses are often custom-built.

     As a result of the shortages of single-family housing, workers must seek
alternate modes of housing.  Mobile homes often accommodate those workers unable
to find suitable housing elsewhere; however, the general sentiment of construc-
tion workers is that mobile homes are undesirable.  Many workers choose to
live instead in "temporary" forms of housing such as boarding rooms, motel
rooms, and recreational vehicles other than mobile homes.  In addition, sub-
standard housing that was not in use before construction began may be utilized.
The conversion of one-family houses to two-family houses may also occur.

     Despite the increase in available housing caused by the easing of
quality standards, mobile homes accommodate many construction workers,  From
1970-1974, the incidence of mobile homes in Sweetwater County,.Wyoming rose
"760%, largely as a result of the Jim Bridger Project, a 2,000 megawatt power
plant. •

     It should be noted that the housing situation may strongly affect the
ability of the community's infrastructure to respond to the strain resultina
from the population increase in  the region.   Concerned communities that try
to recruit doctors, teachers, etc, to the area will have difficulty doing so
if the available housing is inadequate.
     *Lack of funds may be due to a tight money market, or be attributable
to banker's prejudices against construction workers.

     •Campbell, Kimberly A., Case Studies on Energy Impact No. 2: Controlling
Boom Town Development in Sweetwater and Uinta Counties. Wyoming.  National
Association of Counties, Washington D.C., 1976.
                                     I.C-2

-------
                LIST OF SOURCES FOR CONSTRUCTION WORKER CASE  STUDIES


     Baldwin, Thomas E. and Roberta Poetsch, An Approach to Assessing Local
Sociocultural Impacts Using Projections of Population Growth and Composition.
Argonne National Laboratory, Argonne, Illinois, 1977.

     Greene, Marjorie R.  and Martha G. Curry, The Management of Social and
Economic Impacts Associated with the Construction of Large-Scale Projects:
Experiences from the Western Coal Development Communities.  Battelle Pacific
Northwest Laboratories, Richland, Washington, 1977.

     Institute for Policy Research, University of Wyoming, Socioeconomic
Longitudinal Monitoring Project.  The Old West Regional Commission,  Billings,
Montana, 1979.

     Pennsylvania Power and Light Company, Community Affairs Department,
A Monitoring Study of Community Impacts for the Susquehanna Steam Electric
Station.  Pennsylvania Power & Light Company, Allentown, Pennsylvania, 1976.

     Pennsylvania Power and Light Company, Community Affairs Department,
Susquehanna Steam Electric Station Community Impact Monitoring Study;  An
Update.  Pennsylvania Power & Light Company, Allentown, Pennsylvania, 1978.

     Mountain West Research, Inc., Construction Worker Profile.  The Old West
Regional Commission,  Billlings, Montana, 1975.

     Campbell, Kimberly A., Case Studies on Energy Impact. No, 2: Controlling
Boom Town Development in Sweetwater and Uinta Counties, Wyoming.  National
Association of Counties,  Washington, D.C., 1976.

     USR&E, Employment Growth in Rural Areas, Office of Economic Opportunity,
Washington, D.C. 20506,

     University of Wyoming, Black Thunder Project Research team, Final Environ'
mental Assessment: Black Thunder Mine Site, October 1976.
                                      I.C-3

-------
                                 APPENDIX 1-D

                  NATIONWIDE AVERAGE MOTOR VEHICLE EMISSION
                         RATES FOR NMHC , CO, AND NO
MOBILE1 INPUT DATA ASSUMPTIONS

Motor Vehicle Mix by Type

     80.3% Light-duty vehicles  (LDV)
      5.8% Light-duty trucks, 0-6000 Ib GVW*  (LDT1)
      5,8% Light-duty trucks, over 6000 Ib GVW  (LDT2)
      4.5% Heavy-duty gasoline trucks  (HDG)
      3.1% Heavy-duty diesel trucks  (HDD)
      0,5% Motorcycles  (MC)

    100.0%

Vehicle Operation Mode

     20 06% cold start mode
     27o3% hot start mode
     52.1% not stabilized mode
   100.0%

Ambient Temperature:    60 F

Average Vehicle Speed:    30 mph

Geographic Region;  Low Altitude, California, and High-Altitude (Above 4000' MSL)

Year of Composite Emissions:  1980 through 1999 inclusive.
*Gross vehicle weight

                                    I.D-1

-------
   'H^lhlUL AVttoACL HLJCk  VcHICLt;  tfHSSllU* *
            MC LMJ<,SJL>N  FACTORS INCLCLL LVAP. HC LMISSIUN
 CAt. YlAkJ
     UM! 49-STATL
               LLW
    MUti HC:   4.04
LXhAUST  CC:  36.62
EXHAUST NOX:   3.04
                                   VEh. lYF'E
                         TLHP:  60.C(F)
                         3C.J:30.0/30.0/3u.G

                          CUtVQSITt Et'lSilLIN
                            LOTl      IOT2     HOG
                            4.96      J.-.C4    15.17
                           44.96     56.73   160. Ofa
                            3.11      t,.4t>    11.29
   LUV   LUTl  LOT2  H(
                               37.26
                                3.E3
 CAL. YtAK:  19b3
        :  'iS-STATh
               LOV
NON-Ui.TH HC:   2.5l
EXHAUST  CC:   24.of
EXHAUST NUX:   2.3t
                                   VEh. TYPE
                         UMP:  60.C(F)
                         3G.0:30.0/30.0/3'J.O

                          COMPOSITE EH SSI UK
                            LOTl      LUT2
                            3.74      t.SO
                           41.D6     50.62
                            2.62      4.31
   LUV   LOTl  LOT2  HtG
  U.UC3/C.O 56/0.058/0. 04
 MPH (3o.O)     20. 6/ 27
                                               HDD   PC
                                            1>/0. 03 1/0.
                                            . 3/ 20.6
                                          FACfLKi  (GM/MILE)
                      HCG
                     1C.77
                    17J.V3
                     10. bO
           HCD
           2.92
          17.32
          17. 6i>
                     MC
                    3.UG
                    14. b2
                    C.52
                                                ALL MCDES
                                                   3.17
                                                  33.72
                                                   3.35
    CAL.
         K:  19M4
         HO-STATu
               LCV
N(jK-Htlh HC:   2. It
fcXHAULT  CG:  21.46
EXHAUST Nu>:   2.21
          VEH. TYJt
IfcHP: 60.0(F)
3C.O:30.0/3'J.O/:iU.G

 CLPPflSITE EMS5 llih
   LOTl     Li)T?
   3.39     t.3b
  3P.53    47.51
   2.?U     4.04
   LUV   LDT1  LDT2  HOG
  (J.UC3/G. 058/0.05G/0.04
 1IJH (jO.O)     20.6/ 27

 FACfChS (GH/M1LE)
  HDG     ' HCD       HC
  S.4C.     2.69     2.7
-------
 NUfi-IU. [>  ht:    l.'M      3.J7     4.7'-,
 EXHAUST   CE :   lb.93     35.79    44!o<«
 EXHAUSI  NLX:    2.1C      2.66     3.71
                                              Li . ^ i
                                             6U.22
                                             IC.JL
                                     lfc.l«i
                                       1 . «y 
2 .02
CUKPOSIT
LOTl
2. 78
32.67
t EMSSU
LOT2
4. 19
40.43
3.37
JK FACILKS
HOG
136.*15
9.66
(GK/M1LE
hCD
2 .31
16. 9t
13.89
)
MC
1 .3ii
6.57
0.36

ALL MCUES
2.16
& • A »•*
24.46
2.t3
    CAL. YhAK:  1987
         iN:  49-STATE
                       IYPe:   LUV    Ll)T1
                  i£} ^-,      0.a03/C.0
                  30. 0/30.0 MPH (30.0)
                                              HOD   P
                                            /0. 031/0.
                                   20. 6/ 27. 3/ 2u.6
NUN-ML
tXHAUS
EXHACS
T
1
h hC:
CC:
NCX:
LOV
1.53
15.21
1.96
COMPOSITE
LOTl
2. '32
29.93
2.34
EMISb
LOT2
3.72
37. 3C
3.10
1UN FACTL'KS
HOG
6.4fc
12'.. 64
S.OS
(GM/M1LE)
hCD
2.19
16.88
11.72
1
5
C
MC
.01
.3ti
.29
ALL
1
22
MCUES
.96
.32
.66
    CAL. YLAK:  19ay
    REGIUN: <»S
                «      TYPE
             6J.C(F)
       3C. 0:30.0/30.0/30.0
                      LDV    LOTl  LDT2
                     0.aC3/C.Ot)e/O.Ob8/C.C45/0.031/0.005
                    MPH  (30.0)      20. 6/ i7.3/ 20.6


EXhAUSf
EXHAUST


•- HC:
CD:
NCX:

L!JV
13.V;
1.92
COMPOSITE Eh
LOTl
2 "
27
. 31
.33
.21
L
3
34
2
ISSIiJK FACTORS
OT2
.35
.31
.87
HOG
5.93
lit. 61
ft. 60
(GM/M1LE
HCO
2.09
16.83
9.82
)

0
4
0

MC
.60
.67
.24

ALL MCDtS
1.81
2C.52
2.53
    CJL. YLAR:  19H9
    kEClCN: 49-STATt
   NOM-MLIh hC:
   EXHAUST  CC:
   LXHAUbT
 1 .35
12.9fc
^n  • N n      IYHt
/fc-MK i^A^1,, - . r
C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/3C.C

COMPOSITE EMISSION
  Ll^Tl     LDT2
  2.13     3.0^
 24.75    31.47
  2.14     2.71
                                            LUV   LDT1
                                           ^-aC^/0. 058/0. 058/0.0*6/0. 031/0. OOb
                                          MPH (30. G)      20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6

                                          FACTLKS (Gf'/MlLE)
                                           HOG       HCU        MC      ALL HCDES
                                           Ij.b3      2.02      0.65       1.70
                                          Grt.Bb    16. 7S      4.15      19.11
                                           ti.2fc      fc.52      0.21       2.43
    CAL. YLAK: 1990
       T  „  ,. ,
       !£MPS 6D.c(F)
       J( . 0:30. 0/30.
                                      G/3'J.C
                            LIU1   LDT2
                    0. bC^/C.G-id/C. 058/0. G45/0. 03 1/0. 005
                   MPH  (30.0)      20. 6/ 27. 3/ 2C.6
               LCV
MiN-ME Hi hC:   1.30
EXHAUST  CO:  12.33
EXHAUSI NOX:   1.36
                          CUMPgSITL  EHISlilUK
                            LLT1      Ll;T2
                            1.11      2.80
                           22.66     29.03
                            2. Ob      2.61
                           FACTLKS  (GK/M1LE)
                             HLC       HCO
                             '..27      1.96
                           Ho.OC     16.77
                             H.Oi      7.4S
                                        MC
                                                                      ALL MCDES
                                                                         1.62
                                                              3.77       18. C7
                                                              0.2G        2.36
                                        .
    CAL. YIAK: 19S1
                                    LOTl   LOT2  HUG   HLD
              'AS     , -, -  v/«80.>/C.O->fc/C.058/C.C4b/O.C31/
              . 0/30. o/JO.G HPH  (30.0)      20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
NuK-MEil HC :
                  LLV
                  1.2V
        CLiMPJSITE LMSS1UN
          LOTl     IDT2
          1.33     <;.5«
                   FACILKi  (GM/MlLfc)
                    HUG      hCD        MC     ALL MLUES
                    5.0C     1.93      0.44        1.5t

-------
t XHAUZ T CfJ : 11. dl
LXHAUST NbX: 1 .65
CAL. YEAH: 1992
REGILU: 49-STATL
LuV
NUK-MLTh. HC: 1 .24
IXHAUST CO: 11.55
EXHAUit NOX: 1.34
£?.'M
TEMP: 6
3C.O:30
CUMPUS
LDTI
1. 13
19.55
2. )2
1 2t . fi 1
2.51
VEFi. TYPE
.0/30. J/3G.G
I IE Eh ISblOK
LDT2
2.37
24.83
2.44
* it&2
: LOV ^
MPH (JG!
FACTOKS
hLG
44.7fc
7l6c
J6.7',- 3.t>0
6.63 G.19
LDTI LDT2 HDG
.0) '20.6/*27r
(GM/M1LE)
HCD MC
1.9C 0.3*3
16.73 3.27
6.05 C.lfc
J 7.2
               LUV
               1.21
              11.11
               1,84
                 VEh. TYPE:
       1EHP: 60.0(F)
       30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0

        COMPOSITE EKISS10N
          LOT1     LDT2
          1.58     2. Ob
         17.76    21.91
          2.03     2.35
                      LOV   LuTl   LOT2   HDG   HDD   PC
                     U.803/C. 058/0. 058/0 .045/0.03 1/0 .OOb
                    MPH  (30.0)     20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
                    FACTL'hi  (GK/MiLE)
                     HDG       HCD        MC
                     <*.42      1.87      0.35
                    91.06     16.72      3.16
                     7.55      5.3C      O.lb
                            ALL  MECES
                               1.44
                              15. L9
                               2.24
 CAL. YLAR:
 KtGlLiN: 49-STATL
UUh-MLTI: HC:
LXhAUSF  CC:
fcXhAUST N0> ;
 LDV
 1 .?(
ll.Ci>
 1.64
          VEH. TYPE
TEMP: 60.GCF)
3G. 0:30. 0/30. 0/3C.O

 CUMPdSITE EK1SSIUN
   LOT1     LDT2
   1.53     1.91
  16.99    2C.54
   2.04     £.32
                             LOV    LOT1   LDT2   HDG   HDD   FC
                            0.8C3/C. 058/0. 058/C. 045/0. 031/0. 00r>
                           MPH  (30. 0)      20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
FACTLkL (GK/M1LE)
 hDG      HOD       MC
 4.2fc  .  l.Bt     C.31
•*..). 30  * 16.71     3.05
 7.53     5. If     0.18
                                                                        ALL MEUEb
                                                                            1.4^
                                                                           i5.t4
                                                                            2.23
 CAL. YLAK:
 KtGUiN: 49-STATt
    Mtlh hC:
LXHAUST  LO:
tXliAUST NilX:
 LCV
 1.20
11. Ot
 I.d4
          VEH. TYPE
1LMP: 60.CCF)
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0

 COMPOSITE EHJSL1UK
   LDTI     LOT2
   1.53     1.91
  16.99    2C.54
   2. OH     2.2.:
                             LDV   LDTI   LOT2   HCG    HDD   HC
                            vJ.U03/C.O'je/C. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
                           MPh  (30.0)     20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
FACTLKi, (GK/H1LE)
 HLG     ' hCD       MC
 4.2t     1.86     0.31
VJ.30    16.71     3.05
 7.53     5.1h     C.U>
                                                                        ALL MCDLS
                                                                            1.42
                                                                           15. £4
                                                                            2.23
 CAL. YEAH:
 REGION: ^
W»Jh-Ht ft- hC:
LXhAtSF  Ld:
 LLV
 1 ,2t
          VLb.  TYPfc
1EMP: t.O.C(F)
3t .0:30.0/30.0/30.0

 COMPOSITE EMSSION
   LUT1     LDT2
   1.53     1.91
  16.99    21-.54
                             LUV   LJI1   LOT2   HLG    HDD   ft
                            C.tiC'j/C.")5t3/t. 056/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
                           MPh (30. u)     20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
FACFOKS (OH/MILE)
 HOG      HCD       MC
 4.2t     1.86     0.31
90.30    16.71     3.05
                                                                        ALL MLUES
                                                                            1.42
                                                                           15. t4

-------
o
ui
1 AHAU$ r Mf.A : 1 . ."t,
CAL. YtAM 199ri
kLG.lUh: 49-STATE
LUV
NUN-MI Th HC: 1.2C
EXHAUST CO: 11.05
EXHAUST NUX: 1.84

CAL. YLAK: 1999
KEGILK: 49-STATE

LUV
NUN-MLTH HC: 1.20
EXHAUST CL: 11.05
EXHAUST NUX: 1.34

CAL. YlAk: i9dU
REGION: CALIF.

LDV
NON-MLTH HC: 4.01
EXHAUST C(j: 29.16
EXHAUST NUX: 2.52

CAL. YLAk: 19nl
REGION: CALIF.

LUV
NOh-MhTh HC: 3.42
EXHAUSI CC: 25.65
EXHAUST NOX: 2. 30

CAL. YLAk: 1982
KEGIUN: CALIF.

LUV
NfH.-MLfh HC: 2.9C
EAHAUSf CC: 22.47
EXHAUST NGX: 2.14

CAL. YIAK: I9b3
REGILN: CALIF.

LDV
'JLiN-Ml Th HC: 2.4t
EXHAUSI CL : 19.81
EXHAUST N(JX: 2.02
2. 34 s.3S l.^>3 'i.l*! C.Jtt 2.^3
VEh. IVI't: LUV LOJJ LDT2 HOG HOli PC
3C. 0:30. 6/30. J/3u.O MPh (30.0) *20.6/ *27 .3/ *20 .6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACJliKS (GM/M1LE)
LUT1 LUT2 HDG HCD KC ALL MEDES
1.53 1.91 4.26 1.86 0.31 1.42
16.99 2C.54 90. 3C 16.71 3.05 15.fcl
2.04 2.32 7.53 5. It C.ld 2.23
VEh. TYPE: LOV LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 6).0(F) U. 803/0.058/0. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPh (30. 0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 2C.6
CUMPUS1TE EhlSSlUN EACTLKS (CM/MILE)
LOTl LDT2 HOG HCD HC ALL HLLES
1.53 1.91 4.26 1.86 0.31 1.42
16.99 20.54 90.30 16.71 3.05 15. t4
2.04 2.32 V.53 5.1fc C.lti 2.23
VEH. TYPE: LUV LOTl LDT2 HbG HCO PC
TEMP: 6D.C(F) C.80J/C.O-:>e/C.058/C.C45/0. 031/0. 005
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
CUMPQSIIE EMSS1UN FACTLlkS (GM/M1LE)
LDT1 LDT2 HOG HCD MC ALL MLDES
4.70 7.46 1C. 75 2.95 5.66 4.53
42.24 52.62 189.00 17.52 22.54 38.12
2.80 4.71 9.84 16.71 0.26 3.42
VEH. TYPE: LUV LDT1 LOT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) 0 .803/C .058/C .05B/C .04 5/O.C3 1/0 .005
3C. 0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MM. (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
LUMPQSITE EHISS1UN FACTORS (GM/MILE)
LDT1 LOT2 HLb HCD HC ALL MLDES
4.10 < .60 9.47 2.93 5.00 3. SI
38.83 5C.27 191.83 17. 2t 19. b2 35. C3
2.66 4.27 -i.4C 16.16 0.36 3.18
VEh. TYPE: LUV LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) u.UOJ/C. 058/0. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPh (30. C) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
CUMP.1SITE EMSS1UN FACTCkS (GK/M1LE)
LDT1 LDT2 HDG HCD HC ALL MCUES
3.62 5.86 b.36 2.92 4.1ti 3.36
35.19 47.24 193.34 17.12 18. C3 ^2.14
2.54 3.8*3 9.00 15.67 C.44 2. So
VEH. TYPE: LUV LDT1 LDT2 HDG HL-D PC
TEMP: 6J.UF) lj.b03/C.05e/C.05e/C.C'45/C>. 031/0. 005
3(,.C: 30. 0/30. 0/30. C MPh (3C.C) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20. t
tUMPQSITE CHSS1LN FACTUKS (GK/M1LE)
LDT1 LUT2 HOG HCD MC ALL MCOES
3.13 5.17 V.34 ?.01 3.07 2.E9
32. DB 43.93 ld'j.59 17.01 15. P4 29. 2b
2.42 3.50 £-.64 15.26 C.4fc 2.E3

-------
    CAL. YLAI--S  J9«4
    ktCICN: CALIF.
               LUV
    KLH HC:   2.11
EXHAUST  CO:  17.79
EXHAUST NDX:   1.93
                  Vfch.
       ILHPi 63.0(FJ
       3G.O:ja.O/30.0/JC.O

        COMPOSITE EfclS^llifc
          LDTl     LIJT2     hOG
          2.82     *.5.:     6.4c
         29.21    H..37   170. 3&
          2.30     3.20     b.37
                       LDV    LOU
                       .tiuJ/J.U
                        (30.0)
      LDT2  hDG    hDU    fL
      .O^O/O.O^e>/0. 031/0. 005
       20. 6/ 27. 3/ 2C.6
                                             FACTLKS (GK/MILE)
                                                       HCt)
                                                       2.61
                                                      16.9^
                                                      l<».9fc
                                         MC
                                        2.1b
                                       12.00
                                        0.51
                   ALL MCUES
                      2.50
                     26.57
                      2.71
    CAL. YLAk:  19b5
    kEGILiU: CALIF.
               LUV
NUN-METH HC:   1,8t
EXHAUST  CD:  16.31
EXHAUST NOX:   1.86
                 vEh. TYPE
       TEI1P: 60.C(FJ
       3C. 0:30.0/30.0/30.0

        COMPOSITE EtlSSUIN
          LOTl     LCT2
          2.52     3.96
         26.51    37. 2a
          2.21     *.97
                      LDV   Lim   LDT2   HIJG    HDD   PC
                     0.803/C.OSe/C.058/C.O<»b/0.031/0.00*j
                    MPH (30.0)      20. 6/  27. 3/ 20.6
                                             FACfOKb
                                              HLG
                                              5.83
                                               . QB
                                              7.99
                            (Gr'./MILE)
                              HDD
                              2.43
                             16.8ti
                             13.79
            MC     ALL MCOES
           1.53       2.21
           9.15      2A. 3<»
           0.47       2.56
H

b
    CAL. YEAk:  19B6
    RECIL.IM: CALIF.
                 VEh. TYPE
       TEMP: 60.0(F)
       3C. 0:30.0/30.0/30.0
                                               LUV
                            LDTI   LDT2   HDG
                  HDD
                                                                           ^c
                     0.a03/C.05e/C.058/C. 04 5/0. 031/0. 00
                    MPH (30.0)
       20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
NUN-METh
EXHAUST
EXHAUST
HC:
CO:
NOX:
CAL. YEAk:
REGION: CAL
NGN- ML Th he:
EXHAUST CC:
EXHAUST NOX:
LDV
1 .66
15.19
1.82
1987
IF.
LDV
1,52
14.39
1.7b
COMPOSI
LDTl
2.28
24.34
2.13
TEMP: 60
3C.C:30.
COMPOS I
LUT1
2.39
22.45
2.36
TE
EMSS1UN
LOli!
3.4U
34.35
2.60
VEH. TYPE
• C(F)
0/30.0/30.0
IE EMISSION
LUT2
3.07
31.53
2,67
FACIliRS
HDG
5.36
13-., 77
7.60
: LUV
iJ.dO'i/C
MPh (30.
FACTORS
HDG
4.97
U'8.64
7.30
(GM/M1
HCD
2.27
16.84
11.92
LDTl
.056/C
0)
(GK/MI
HCD
2.16
U.BO
10. 2C
LE)
MC
1.12
7.13
0.35
LDT2 HDG
.050/C.04
20. 6/ 27
LE)
MC
U.65
5.61
C.27
ALL MCDE
1.9b
22.45
2.46
S
HDD fC
5/0.031/0.005
.3/ 20.6
ALL MEDES
1.62
21. Ci
2.35
    CAL. Yl-AK:  19b6
    REG1LN:  CALIF.
                 VEh. TYPE
       TtMPl 60.C(F)
       3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/3C.O
                      LDV   LOTl   LDT2   HDG    HDD   MC
                     C.UOJ/C. 058/0. 05B/C. 045/0. 031/0.005
                    MPH  (3C.O)     20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
UuN-METh hC:
EXHAUST CC:
EXHAUST NliX:
LDV
nl7t
1,77
COMPOSITE
LLT1
1.94
20.92
2.H
EMSS
LUT2
i!.7H
29.0JJ
i.57
ION FACTC'KS
hDb
4.74
11V.21
7.1 2
(GK/M1LE)
iiCD
2.0fc
16.77
9.7C
MC
0.69
5.01
0.22
ALL MECES
1.70
19.65
2.27
    CAL. YLAK:  1909
    kEGILlit  CALIF.
   NUK-METh  HC:
   t'XHAUST   CL:
   EXHAUSI NUX:
 LLv
 1 .36
13.31
 l.?t
          VEh. TYPE
UHP: 6J.C(F)
30. 3:33. 3/3J, 0/30. C

 COMPOSITE EMSSllJh FACTtjrL
   LDTl     1012     hTG
   1.63     ?.50     4.^)7
  19.75    27.02   111.13
   !.')&     I.5i     7.00
                             LOV    LUT1   LOT2  HDG   HDD   PC
                            u.aOj/0. 056/0. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
                           MPH  (30. 0)      2o,6/ i'7.3/ 2C.6
(CM/MILE)
  HCD
  2.0C
 16.75
  7.69
                                                              MC
                                                             C.5t
                                                             4.41
                                                             0.19
ALL MCOfcS
   1.62
  16.55
   2.22

-------
a
CAL. YIAKS 1990
KEG.1CN: CALIF.
LCV
NOK-MLTI- HC: 1.31
EXHAUST CO: 13.32
EXHAUST NOX: 1.75

CAL. YEAR: 1991
KLGIOU: CALIF.

LOV
KON-MLTh HC: 1.2fc
EXHAUST CO: 12.80
EXHAUST NUX: 1.74

CAL. YLAK: 1992
REGION: CALIF.

LOV
NON-METh HC : 1.26
EXHAUST CO: 12.61
EAHAUST NOX: 1.74

CAL. YfeAkJ 1993
REGlUj: CALIF.

LLV
hUK-P,fcTH HC: 1.2**
EXHAUST CO: 12.44
EXHAUSI NLX: 1.74

CAL. YEAR: 1994
kEGHIN: CALIF.

LGV
NUK-Mtlh HC: 1.2?
EXHAUST CL: 12. 3C
EXHAUST NOX: 1.74

CAL. YLAh: 1995
KLGILN: CALIF.

Lt V
NUI«-MLIh HC: 1.21
EXHAUSI CO: 12. 2b
EXHAUST MiX: 1.74
JLMPl t>').C(F) C'.6lCj/C.O-;fi/O.Oi>fl/O.C4t/O.C31/0.005
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ P/.3/ 26.6
COMP3SIlt EMSS10N FACTGhS (GM/MILE)
LOT1 LOT/ hLG HCD HC ALL MCOtS
1.72 2.39 4.4C, 1.95 C.47 1.65
18.89 25. U' 105.07 16.73 3.9B 18. 2«
1.92 2.46 fc.95 6.8fc C.lfc 2.1t
VEH. TYPE: LOV LUU LOT2 HOG HOD PC
TEMP: 6D.O(F) 0.d03/C.058/C.056/0. 045/0. 031/0.005
3C. 0:30.0/33.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. j/ 2C.t
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTCivS (GM/MILE)
LOT1 LOT2 HOG HCO KC ALL MCDES
1.63 2.2C s.26 1.92 0.41 1.50
17.94 23.51 100.64 16.72 3.65 17.75
1.91 2.43 6.97 6.21 C.17 2.1c
VEH. TYPE: LOV LOT1 LOT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) ti.80j/C.058/C. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. u05
3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/2J.O MPh (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTOkS (GM/M1LC)
LUT1 LPT2 HOG HCD MC ALL MCOES
1.54 2.04 4.13 1.9C C.38 1.46
17.11 22.33 97.23 16.71 3.37 17.32
1.90 2.40 6.99 5.75 C.17 2.14
VEH. TYPE: LDV LOT1 LDT2 HDG hDU PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) J.«03/C. 058/0. 05B/0. 045/0. 031/0, 005
3C.O:30.0/30.0/3C.C HPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTOKS (CM/MILE)
LOT! LDT2 HOG HCD HC ALL MLOES
1.47 1.89 4.00 1.8fc 0.37 1.43
16.33 21.01 94.80 16.71 3.29 16. $5
1.90 2.37 7.04 5.44 0.17 2.1J
VEH. TYPE: LDV LDT1 LOT2 HCG HDD PL
TEMP: 63.0(F) D.8C3/C. 058/0. 056/C.C45/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 0:30.0/33.0/30.0 MPH (3o.O) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EP1SS10K FACTL'KS (GK/M1LE)
LOT1 LDTi: »
-------
CAL. YLAki 1916
kEGlUNi CALIF.
LUV
NUN-HE TH HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CD: 12.2H
EXHAUSI m*X: 1.74
CAL. YLAK: 1997
REGIUN: CALIF.
LDV
NJK-MEIh HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CO: 12,20
EXHAUST NUX: 1.74
CAL, YtAk: 1996
REGILN: CALIF.
LDV
NUN-METH HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CL: 12.2E
EXHAUST NUX: 1.74
•
? CAL. YEAH: 1999
o° REGIUN: CALIF.
LOV
NUN-MET H HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CU: 12. 2H
EXHAUST MLX: 1.74
CAL. YEAf : 1-JnO
REGIUN: HI-ALT.
LDV
NON-MEH, HC: 5.22
tXHAUST CO: 54. 1C
EXHAUSI NUX: 2.47
CAL. YEAR: 19M1
REGIUN: HI-ALT.
LUV
NUN-HLIH HC: 4.40
EXHAUST CC: 46.41
EXHAUST NUX: 2.3C
CAL. YIAK: 19U2
3C. O:3O.6/30. J/JiO.L
COMPOSITc tMSSJUK
LDT1 LUT2
1.36 1.63
15.09 lt.6«J
1.>1 2.34
VEH. TYPE
1EMP: 60.C(F)
3C. 0:10.0/30.0/30.0
COMPOSITE EMSMUN
LDTl LDT2
1.36 1.63
15.19 16.69
1.91 2.34
VEH. TYPE
TEMP: 6G.O(F)
3C.C:30.0/30.0/3C.O
COMPOSITE EMSSIUN
LOT! LDT2
1.16 1.63
15.09 16.69
1.91 2.34
VEH. TYPE
TEMP: dJ.O(F)
30.0:30.0/33.0/30.0
COMPOSITE EMSSIUN
LOTl LOTl
1.36 1.63
15.09 H.69
1.91 i.34
VEH. TYPE
TLMPs 60.C(F)
3C.O: JO.O/30.0/3C.C
CUMP'JSITE EMISSIUN
LDTl LDT2
6.26 1C. 04
63.36 91.66
2.19 3.77
VCh. TYPE
TEMP: 60.c8.Sb
7.U 11. 4t 0.27 2.€tJ
: LUV LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD PC
0. 80 3/0. 058/0. 058/0. 04 5/0. 03 1 /C . 005

-------
*.Li>Jur*: fii-ALf.
LUV
NON-MET h HC: 3.6«;
EXHAUST CL: 39. 4G
EXHAUST NtJX: 2.14

CAL. YEAk: 19H3
KECILN: HI-ALT.

LUV
NGN-MET h HC: 3.10
EXHAUST tC: 33.26
EXHAUST NOX : 2.03

CAL. YIAK: I9ti4
KLGILU: Hl-ALf.

LDV
NUN-MET h HC: 2.61
EXHAUSf CO: 28.06
EXHAUST NCX: 1.95

H CAL. YEAk: 19b5
b ktGION: HI-ALT.
i
•a
LLV
NUN-MET H HC: 2.2i
EXHAUST CO: 23.90
EXHAUST NuX: 1.90

CAL. YEAk: 19d6
KEGIUN: HI-ALT.

LLV
UUN-HLTH HC: 1.93
EXHAUST CC: 23,57
EXHAUST NUX: 1,87

CAL. YlArf: I9b7
kEGILN: HI-ALT.

L3V
NUN-HtTh hC: 1,71
LXhAUST CG: 17.92
EXHAUST NCX: 1.84
JL . VI 3t}. O/ lO.U/^'j .1, Mf'H {ju.Uf tiU.t/ *//.JX £(Jtt
COMPOSITE EM SSI Lift FACTCiKi (GM/MIL£J
LOTl L13T2 hi)G HDD MC ALL MCDtS
5.11 t.lfc 1L.31 4.16 7.07 4.72
59.06 e0.3F 271. ^t 22. 3S 26.21 52. Sb
2.31 3.1'J 7.0fc 11. 3S 0.33 2.70
VEH. TYPE: LOV LOTl LDT2 HUG HOD MC
TEMP: 60.C(F) 0.803/C. 058/0. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C.O:30.0/30.0/3G.O MPH (3C.O) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE HUSSION FACTC'KS (GK/M1LE)
LDT1 LDT2 HOli HCO MC ALL MCDES
4.59 7.35 16.44 3.95 6.G8 4.C7
55.38 74.82 259.97 26.03 23.01 46. Sb
1.98 2.99 7.00 11.35 0.32 2.5d
VEh. TYPE: LDV LDTl LDT2 HOC HDD PC
TEMP: 60.0(F) U.8G3/C. 058/0. 058/C. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTbKS (CM/MILE)
LDTl LOT2 HDG hCD MC ALL MCDES
4.10 t.51 14.43 3.5fc 4.29 3.49
50.62 6E.OO 235.27 26.72 17.51 40.92
2.04 2.87 6.92 10.65 0.25 2.49
VEh. TYPE: LOV LDTl LDT2 HDG MOD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) 0.803/C.058/C.058/C. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 0:30.0/30,0/30.0 MPH (3C.O) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6

COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTIJKS (GM/M1LE)
LDTl LDT£ hDG HDD MC ALL MEDES
3.67 5.70 12.44 B.lfc 2.94 3. CO
4?. 77 6C.92 209.44 24.68 12.64 35. t3
2.32 2.72 6.75 3.44 0.21 2.40
V£H. TYPE: LDV LOTl LDT2 HUG HDD hC
TEMP: 6J.C(F) 0.803/0. 068/0. 058/G. 045/0. G31/0. 005
3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/JO.O MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20,6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACICkS (CM/MILE)
LOTl LOT2 HOG hCD MC ALL MCDES
3.27 4.97 10.75 2.83 2.C52 2.fcl
4C.78 54. U 184.11 22. 8C 9.60 31. C6
1.94 ?.54 o.5i 6.32 C.19 2.31
VEh. TYPE: LDV LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD I"C
TtMP: 60.0(F) O.U03/0. 058/0. 058/0. C45/0. 031/0. 005
30. 0:30. 0/30. u/Ju.O MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTOKS (GK/M1LF. )
LOTl LOT*! HDG HLD MC ALL MCDES
2.93 4.35 9.3b 2.5h 1.44 2.31
36.59 4E.42 164.49 21.16 7.53 27.41
1.91 i.4^ G.44 7.33 0.18 2.25
CAL. YLAiv:
KLGIC-N: HI-ALT.
          VCh. TYPE:  LUV   LOU  LDT2  HDG   HDD   FC
TEMP: 60.C(F)        0,d03/C.058/0.05b/C.045/0.031/0.U05
3C.0:30.0/30.0/3J.0 MPH (30.0)     20.6/ 27.3/ 20.ft

-------
LUV
NUN-KLTH liC: 1.55
EXHAUST CL: 15. 79
EXHAUST NUX: 1.53
CAL. YLAK: 19H9
*EGIGN: HI-ALT.
•LDV
NUN-MET H hC: 1.44
EXHAUST CO: 14. 2t
fcXHAUSI NuX: 1.8J
CAL, YEAR: 1990
REGION: HI-ALT.
LOV
NQN-MtT> HC: 1.37
EXHAUST CGI 13.24
EXHAUST NUX: 1.62
CAL, YEAR; 1991
HEGIUN: HI-ALT.
LOV
NGN-HE TH HC: 1.31
EXHAUST CU: 12.51
EXHAUST NuX: 1.82
CAL. YIAK: 1992
REGION: HI-ALT.
LOV
NUN-Hf Th HC: 1.27
EXHAUST CG: 11.99
EXHAUST NUX: l.: 1 .&i
CHMPtlSlTE tVJSSlUK FACfiiKS (CM/M1L£)
LOTl LDJi HDG HCU HC ALL HLUES
2.64 3.86 8.34 2.3C J.JO 2.Cfl
32.*i2 43.26 147.61 20.04 6.28 24.37
I.fl6 2.31 6.43 6.66 C.18 2.20
VEH. TYPE: LUV LUT1 LDT2 HOG HDD fC
TEMP: 60.0(F) u. 003/0.358/0.058/0.045/0.031/0.005
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTORS (GK/MILE)
LOTl LDT2 hDG HDD HC ALL MEUES
2.38 3.47 7.53 2.23 C.fi7 LSI
2fi.71 3P.59 133.03 19.14 5.41 21. Sd
1.86 2.2t 6.48 6.12 0.16 2.18
VEH. TYPE: LUV LDT1 LDT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.CJF) 0.d03/C.058/C. 058/0. 045/0. 031/C. 005
3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTORS (GK/M1LE)
LDT1 LDT2 HDG HDD MC ALL MCDES
2.16 3. 1H b.91 2.11 0.68 1.79
25.71 34.93 122.01 16. 4C 4.76 20.23
1.36 2.23 b.54 5.66 0.19 2.17
VEh. TYPE: LOV LDT1 LDT2 HDG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) U.UOJ/C.058/C.058/C. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 3:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACfLkS (GH/M1LE)
LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD MC ALL MCDES
1.99 2.89 6.33 2.03 0.56 l.£9
23.26 31.61 113.88 17.90 4.32 16. S3
l.dB 2.20 6.64 5.36 0.19 2.16
VEh. TYPE: LUV LDT1 LDT2 HDG HOD PC
HMP: 60.C(F) 0.6C3/C. 056/0. 058/0. 045/0. 031/0. 005
30.0:30.0/30.0/30.0 MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMSSION FACTLkS (GK/MILE)
LOTl LDT2 HDG HDD MC ALL MEDES
1.34 2.62 5.U4 1.96 0.45 1.61
21.37 2E.69 107. bb 17.55 3.93 17.94
1.39 2.19 6.75 5.17 0.19 2.16
VEh. TYPE: LUV LIH1 LDT2 HUG HDD PC
TEMP: 60.C(F) o.60J/C.058/C.05e/C. 045/0. C31/O.U05
3C. 0:30. 0/30. 0/30.0 MPh (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTLkS (GM/M1LE)
LOTl LOT2 HDG HDD hC ALL MEDES
1.72 2.40 5.44 1.94 C.42 1.54
19. 9J 2t.26 103.02 17.31 3.60 17.16
1.92 i.ia 6.05 5.03 C.19 2.17
CAL. YEAR: 1994
REGION: HI-ALT.
          VEf . TYPE
TEMP: 60.0(F)
3C.0:30.0/33.0/30.0
;   LUV    LDT1   LDT2   HUG    HDD    PC
  •J. 303/0.056/0.058/0.04 5/0.03 1/0.005
MPh  (30.0)     20.6/ 27.3/ 20.6
 COMPJSITE EP-ISSIUN
                                                 (GM/M1LE)

-------
LLV
hUN-ML TH HCi I .22
EXHAUST CO: 11. 2U
EXHAUST NCX: 1.83
CAL. YIAR: 1995
REGION: HI-ALT.
LUV
NON-MEIH HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CD: 11. U
EXHAUST Ml>: 1.33
CAL. YEAKJ 1996
KEG1UN: HI-ALT.
LOV
NUN-HE Th HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CLi: 11.16
EXHAUST NGX: 1.63
CAL. YEAR: 1997
RL-GIUN: HI-ALT.
LDV
NUN-METH HC: 1.21
EXHAUST CO: 11. lo
EXHAUST NCX: 1.33
CAL. YEAR: 1998
REGILNI HI-ALT.
LDV
NUN-MET H hC: 1.21
EXHAUST CO: 11. lb
EXHAUST NUX: 1.83
CAL. YEAP: 1999
REGION: HI-ALT.
LOV
NUN-MLfh hC: 1.21
EXHAUST CGJ ll.lt
EXHAUST NUX: 1.63
LOT I LUJ.' HOC* HDD MC ALL HLU£S
1.63 2.21 :>.UV 1.91 0.40 1.49
lfi.84 24.42 99.96 l?.lfi 3.72 16. tt
1.95- 2.18 6.96 4.93 0.19 2.lfc
VCh. TYPE: LOV LOT1 LDT2 HDG HOD ^C
TEMP: 6.1. C(F) 0.a03/C. 056/0. Ob8/0»C^5/0. 031/0. COb
3C.OJ30. 0/30. 0/30. C MPH (30.0) 20. 6/ 27. 3/ 20.6
cuMPQsne EMISSION FACTUKS (GM/MILE)
LUTl LDT2 HUG HCO MC ALL MCfcES
1.56 2.02 6 16.21
1.97 2.18 7.05 4.87 0.19 2.18
VEH. TYPE: LOV LDT1 LOT2 HDG HDD HC
TEMP: 6J.O(F) 0.803/C.058/C.058/C. 045/0. 031/0. 005
3C. 0:30.0/30. 0/30.0 MPH (30. C) 20. 6/ 27.3A20.6
COMPOSITE EMISSION FACTORS (GM/MILE)
LUTl IDT2 HDG HDD HC ALL MCGES
1.56 i:.02 4.bO 1.89 C.36 1.46
17. d7 22.50 9o.92 17. Ot 3.56 16.21
1.97 2.1« 7.J5 4.87 C.19 2.18

-------
                                 APP&7DIX I-E

               NATIONWIDE AVERAGE MOTOR VEHICLE EMISSION RATES
                             FOR TSP, PB, AND SO
                                                X


Calculation of Lead  (Pb) Emission Rates

     Motor vehicle lead emission rates vary primarily with the lead content of
gasoline, the fraction of lead retained within the exhaust system of the
vehicle/ and its fuel economy.  Indirectly, vehicle speed and calendar year
also affect mobile source lead emissions.  Emission rates were calculated using
the following equation:

          E  =  PB X FR 7 GM


          where:     PB  =  average lead content of gasoline (g/gal), a

                            function of year, see Table E-i.


                     FR  =  fraction of combusted lead that is emitted by

                            the vehicle, for 30 mph this is 0.23.
                     GM  =  average fuel economy  (mi/gal), a function of

                            year, see Table E-20
Numerical results are independent of region and are given by calendar year in
Section 4.20.

Calculation of Particulate  (TSP) Emission Rates

     Motor vehicle emission rates for particulates are given in EPA's AP-42
publication* for vehicles burning leaded or unleaded gasoline; no listing for
a mixture of such vehicles by calendar year is shown.  To obtain the temporal
variation due to changes in lead emission rates, the particulate emission rate
for unleaded gasoline in light duty vehicles (0.05 g/mi exhaust plus 0.20 g/mi
tire wear) was assumed to apply in the year 1999 and additions to this value
*EPA Office of Air Quality planning and Standards, Compilation of Air Pollutant
Emission Factors, Third Edition, Supplements 1-10, Publication No. AP-42,
Research Triangle Park, NC, 1980.
                                     IvE-1

-------
                                   TABLE E-l
                                 POOLED AVERAGE
            LEAD CONTENT OF GASOLINE BURNED  BY VEHICLE POPULATION*
                                                      Lead Content
              Year                                       (g/gal)
              1974                                         2.0
              1975                                         1.7
              1976                                         104
              1977                                         1.0
              1978                                         0.80
              1979                                         0.50
              1980                                         0.50
              1981                                         0.50
              1982                                         0.34
              1983                                         0.25
              1984                                         0.19
              1985                                         0.15
              1986                                         0.13
              1987                                         0.11
              1988                                         0.09
              1989                                         0.08
              1990 - 1999                                  0.05
*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Supplemental Guidelines  for Lead
Implementation Plans, EPA-450/2-78-038, Research Triangle Park, NC,  1978,
                                     I.E-2

-------
                                  TABLE E-2

                          AVERAGE FLEET FUEL ECONOMY*
Calendar
Year
1974-1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981-1982
1983-1984
1985-1989
1990-1994
1995-1999
Fuel Economy
(mi/gal)
12.4
13.3
14.0
14,8
15.7
16.8
19.1
21.7
26.2
27.4
*U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, A Report on Automotive Fuel Economy,
Washington, D.C., February, 1974.

15 USC 2002, enacted December 22, 1975.
                                    I.E-3

-------
were made for earlier calendar years to account for the increased lead emissions.
These light-duty vehicle TSP emission rates were combined with heavy-duty
factors given in AP-42.  The resulting TSP emission rates are summarized, by
year, in Section 4.20.

Calculation of Sulfur Oxide (SOY) Emission Rates

     Motor vehicle emission rates for sulfur oxides are taken from EPA's AP-42
publication and weighted by the assumed percentages of light and heavy-duty
vehicles in the population.  The resulting SO  emission rate, independent of
region and calendar year, is included in Section 4.20.
                                     I.E-4

-------
                       APPENDIX  I-F:  PEERS Methodology1


       In  1972,  the  Water  Resources Council published projections of economic
 activity  for  the  nation and  a  number  of  regional groupings,  including states,
 water resources regions,  and SMSAs.   Included were projections of population,
 personal  income,  employment, and earnings of persons by industry,2 for  1980,
 1985,  1990, 2000, and  2020.  The projections were the joint effort of the
 Bureau of Economic  Analysis3 (BEA) of the Department of Commerce/ and the
 Economics, Statistics  & Cooperative Service4 of the United States Department
 of Agriculture.   The projection  program  acquired the acronym OBERS, based upon
 the  former names  of the two  groups.

       The 1972  OBERS projections were based upon the 1967 Series C population
 projections of  the  Census Bureau.  Series C assumes high birth rates which,
 though somewhat lower  than the actual rates of the early 1960s, were still
 higher than the rates  of  the 1960s and early 1970s,  Because of the decreasing
 trend  in  population growth rates, in  1974 revised OBERS projections were issued
 based  on  Series E population projections published December, 1972 by Census.
 The  E  Series  assumes a population of  263.8 million in  2000,  compared to a Series
 C population  of 306.8  million.

       More recently, in October  1977, BEA issued, under contract to the Office
 of Water  Program  Operations, EPA, a set  of interim revisions for states only,
 incorporating adjustment  for the overseas population,  and the significant 1970
 Census undercount.  These revisions are  based on Series II Census population
 estimates,6 and assume a  population in «.000 of 265.8 million,

       A quinquennial update  of the OBERS projections was issued in 1980,
 and  was based upon  Series II projections of more recent vintage.  There are
complete revisions for  all regional  classifications  and industries.
       The following discussion is partly based upon information from: U.S,
Water Resources Council, 1971 OBERS Projections, Series E, Vol. 1, Concepts,
Methodology and Summary Data, April 1974.
      2
       There were 37 OBERS sectors in this report.

       Formerly Office of Business Economics,
      4
       Formerly the Economic Research Service,

       Current Population Report P-25, #493.

       Current Population Reports P-25, #704, July 1977 estimates 2000 popula-
tion at 260,3 million, without adjustment for 1970 undercount.
                                        I.F-1

-------
 included in the  1974  Series  E work.

       The three  sets  of  projections  issued  to  date may be  summarized  as
 follows:
       Name  ot  Projection

     1972  OBERS,  Series C
     Revised 1972 OBERS, Series E
     Interim Revisions
Publication  Forecasting     2000
	Date       Group	   Population

    1972      BEA/USDA      306.8 m
    1974      BEA/USDA      263.8 m
October 1977' BEA for EPA    265.8 m
The principal differences between  the Series E  and Series C projections ares

                                                 Series C       Series E
      Domestic Population  (2000)
      Total Personal Domestic Income
         (2000) million $ 1967
      Cropland Harvest "(acres)  2000
               306,8 m

              2,542,849
               309,7 m
263.8 m

2,154,266
271,9 m
These differences are the result of different population growth rate assump-
tions.   There are additional differences:

      •    hours worked per year are projected to decline  ,35%
           per year in Series E, compared to ,25% in Series C,

      •    The rate of increase in product per person-hour in the
           private economy is 2.9% per year in Series E, compared
           to 3.0% in Series C.  Even so, this is an exceedingly
           optimistic assumption which may not be consistent with
           recent trends in productivity growth.  In 1978, for
           instance, productivity growth in the private economy
           was about 0.8% from 1967-1977.

      •    Income data for 1970 and 1971 and total employment
           data for 1970 was included in the Series E work.
           This provides an additional historical base upon
           which to base extrapolations, and results in changes
           in some projections of area activity from the Series
           C work,

There are some additional important assumptions underlying the basic OBERS
methodology.  Most fundamental is that the projections are based upon long
run trends and ignore cyclical fluctuations such as the 1973-74 recession.
The OBERS analysts assume that nationally a 4 percent unemployment rate will
prevail, though there will be regional disproportionalities — we may  regard
this unemployment assumption as potentially quite optimistic.
      Conversation with Ken Johnson, BFA, D.C,, 1/17/79.
                                         I.F-2

-------
                                                                         g
       OBERS regional projections are based on the following assumptions:

       •    trends toward economic area self-sufficiency in local-
            service industries will continue

       •    workers will migrate to areas of perceived economic
            opportunity from slow-growth or declining areas

       •    regional earnings per worker and income per capita
            will converge toward the national average

       •    regional employment/population ratios will move
            toward the national ratio.

 The primary regional economic unit in  the OBERS projection system is the  BEA
 economic area,  of which there are currently 183,9  All other regional projec-
 tions,  i.e.,  for states,  water resource areas,  SMSAs, are based upon divisions
 and combinations of portions of these  economic  areas,

      One of  the key characteristics of these economic areas is that each is
 self-sufficient as to labor market (place of work)  and labor supply (place of
 residence.).  There is minimal commuting access economic area boundaries.

      Two types of industries, are considered within each economic area.   One
 type is  the basic,  or export,  industries which  produce goods and services
 most of  which are exported  to other  economic areas in return for goods and
 services.   The  second type  of industry is termed  "residentiary" by the OBERS
 group, in that  this group produces most of the  services and some of the goods
 required by households, as  well as local business in need of intermediate
 products.   Residentiary industries include general and convenience retail and
 wholesale trade activities  and other services difficult to transport and  thus
 utilized in the vicinity  of their production,   Economic areas are considered
 to  be nearly  self-sufficient in these  residentiary industries.

      Economic  area projections are  carried out in somewhat different fashion
 for each of the following four groups:

      •     basic  industries except agriculture  and  armed  forces
      •     agriculture
      •     residentiary industries
      •     armed  forces.

The regional distribution of armed forces within  the  United  States  is  governed
primarily by government decision,  rather  than economic  forces,  Assumptions
are made concerning a uniform geographic  reduction of these  forces  in  future
years, in some  cases with significant effect upon  local earnings  and employment
      8
       U.S. Water Resources Council, 1972 OBERS Projections:  Regional Economic
Activity in the U.S., Vol. 1, p, 6, April 1974,
      9
       However, there were only 173 at the time of the 1972 Series E projections.
                                        I.P-3

-------
 in those 34 economic areas in which the armed forces is a major factor in the
 economic activity.

      The magnitude of earnings and employment in residentiary industries is
 assumed to be a function of regional total employment or income, and is thus
 closely allied to the projections for the basic industries.  Agriculture
 earnings and employment projections represent only a slight modification of
 the basic industry methodology.  Thus, because of the relationship of the
 basic industries  (mining, construction, and manufacturing)  to residentiary
 sectors, as well as the similarity of the basic industry and agriculture
 projection techniques,  a discussion of the methodology for  the basic indus-
 tries is outlined below.
      Shift-Share Analysis

      Basic industries are projected using a variation of shift-share analysis.
 The shift-share technique includes a proportional growth element,  as well as
 a differential growth element between an economic area and the nation for
 each industry or income component, such as earnings.   Thus:

      E.fc  = (E.VE.X)  E.X + cx-fc
       13      10  10    ij    i]

 where i and j  refer  to the ith industry and the  jth region;  o refers to the
 sumation  of regions,  i.e.,  the nation;  t and x refer  to the  projected time
 point (e.g.,  2000) and the base point (e.g.,  1971)  respectively; and Cx~t
 refers to the  difference between  the national growth  rate and the  regional
 level actually attained by the industry over the same period.

      The  first term  on the right-hand side of the equation assumes that
 industry  i in  region  j  will have a rate  of growth equal to that of  all
 industry  i in  the nation (proportional  growth).   The  second  right-hand term
 (Cj_j) is  the shift-share,  or  regional share,  which measures  the difference
 between the attained  level  of the left-hand side (Eij),  and  the proportional
 growth of the  first  term.   This term may be either positive  or negative,
 depending upon whether  it  represents a  regional  comparative  advantage (the
 region is  growing faster than the rest  of the nation,  insofar  as the  industry
 is concerned)  or a comparative disadvantage (relatively  slower growth).

      Numerous  approaches have been taken  over the  past  20 years to the pro-
 jection of the Cj_j term.  Each of  these approaches presumably incorporates the
causal economic ractors  associated with the regional  share.  Nevertheless,
 there is yet considerable uncertainty about the  causal  factors and the
 appropriate independent  variables, and  the  OBERS analysts  chose a  simpler
 approach  to projecting the  shift-share  (C..).

     For each  industry, a curve was  fitted  to each  region's percent of total
national income and employment, respectively, for  all available years.  This
curve was extended to provide the  region's  expected percentage  of  earnings
and employment in a given industry in the various  target years,  A  least
squares  regression line fitted to the  logarithm of the percentage shares
converted the data to a ratio scale so  that the historical growth rate and
                                    I.F-4

-------
the projected rate could be compared by analyzing the comparative slopes of
the historical and extended portion of the trend line.

     In addition, considerable expert review was carried out on the projections,
for example to detect discrepancies between the separate earnings or employment
trends, or to reflect additional knowledge about the supply of resources upon
which a particular industry is dependent.  Such discrepancies were reconciled,
often by experts in a particular BEA economic area, and the regional percen-
tages were normalized and applied to previously projected national totals to
yield earnings and employment projections for 173 economic areas.

     The entire technique assumes that "regional comparative advantage or dis-
advantage for an industry is reflected in the trend of the changing contribu-
tion of a given region to the U.S. total of that industry, and that the
comparative advantage or disadvantage that underlies a region's changing posi-
tion will continue throughout the projected time period, though not necessar-
ily in constant degree, unless altered by some event  or force."!  The
analysis of the projections by experts attempts to take account of such forces
by modifying the mathematically projected value for a region.

     OBERS uses the BEA economic area as its basic economic unit, and creates
other geographic classifications as either aggregations or disaggregations of
these areas.  Fortunately, BEA economic areas are defined along county lines.
The result is that the index value for an industry in a county for a given
projection year may be derived by determining the percentage of national
activity in that industry accounted for by the BEA area of which the county
is a part.  These county shares may then be aggregated in weighted fashion .
  U.S.  Water Resources Council,  op.cit.,  p.  25,
                                   I.P-5

-------
       APPENDIX I;G:  Alternative Formulation of the Baseline Projection
     Impact assessment methodologies typically take one of two approaches to
baseline projection:

     (1)  projections of population and economic activity both with
          and without the project are produced.  The effects of the
          project represent the simple differences in activity be-
          tween the two projections,

     (2)  A projection of economic activity without the project is,
          produced.  Then the marginal effects of the project are
          analyzed.  Total future economic activity in the impact
          area with the presence of the project is the sum of the
          two analyses.

In fact, the first procedure above implies that the marginal effects of the
project have been estimated in order to produce a new baseline projection
with the project.

Alternative Concept

     Many projects - even those of substantial size - can be accommodated
within assumed patterns of baseline growth in economic activity,   (See
Figure G-l and G-2).  This baseline growth projection (B)  already presupposes
additional industrial, population, and residential activity for all of which
the jurisdictions in the impact area may have planned accordingly:

     Case 1 - Assume that facility A commences operations in the
     impact area.  The economic activity attributable to the
     facility (AZ, Figure G-l)   can be accomodated within existing
     local and regional growth plans and baseline projecitons (BZ),

     Case 2 - Assume that Facility C commences operations in the
     impact area (CZ, Figure G-2).  The economic activity attribu-
     table to this project is so large (CZ) that it cannot be
     accommodated within existing plans for baseline growth (BZ),
     Serious problems will arise at least from that amount of
     activity (CB) in excess of local projections.  This case is
     represented by the boomtown effects of a large new source in
     a small community.

     The purpose of the techniques in this manual is to allow the user to
ascertain the effects solely attributable to the project (CZ or AZ), i,e,f
the marginal effects of the project.  Given the alternative formulation of
                                  I. G-l

-------
the baseline projection outlined you could evaluate whether these effects
could or could not be accommodated within existing baseline projections and
growth plans, the assumption being that the baseline projection implicitly
accounts for effects issuing from the probable location of facilities similar
to the facility.

     This alternative was rejected in writing this manual because it was con-
sidered not acceptable to rely on local planning objectives to determine
whether identified impacts are acceptable.  The approach we have taken in
this manual of 1) baseline projection without projection, plus (2) marginal
effects of project explicitly assumes that the baseline projection does not
anticipate the effects of the facility.
                                I.G-2

-------
                            -H


                            •H

                            •P
                            U
                            o
                            C
                            O
                            o
H

b

OJ
B
                                                                           t+n
                                                      TIME
                        R - Effects  of  Facility A

                        B = Assumed  Baseline Growth
                               Figure G-l.   Representative Growth Scenarios  (Case 1}

-------
                                                                                           B
H

O
                           •H
                           4J
                           U
O
•H

O

O
O
w
                                                             TIME
                              FIGURE G-2.   Representative Growth Scenarios  (Case  2)

-------
APPENDIX I.H:  Explanation of Standard Industrial Classification System

     The user manual and Appendix I.E. refer occasionally to two-, three-, and
four-digit SIC industries.  This appendix explains the meaning of this reference.

     The Standard Industrial Classification  (SIC) Manual was originally developed
by the Office of Management and Budget "to promote the comparability of statistics
describing various facets of the economy of the nation."*  OMB's responsibility
has since been assumed by the Office of Federal Statistical Policy and Standards
in the Department of Commerce.

     The SIC system classifies industries in accordance wi-th the composition
and structure of their activity, and covers all economic activities.  Periodic-
ally, the SIC manual is revised to reflect the changing industrial composition
of the economy.

     The SIC is widely used by researchers who wish to compare economic activity
over tiitte.  Similarly, a number of government and private agencies collect and
organize data in a form which corresponds to SIC classifications.  The SIC is
structured so that a one-digit division is the least disaggregated, and a four-
digit industry is an extremely specific activity.  Consequently, there are
twelve one-digit SIC classes:

     •  agriculture, forestry and fisheries

     *  mining

     •  construction

     •  manufacturing

     •  transportation, communications, electric, gas and
        sanitary services

     •  wholesale trade

     •  finance, insurance, and real estate

     »  services

     •  public administration

     •  nonclassifiable establishments

and hundreds of four-digit industries.  Data are generally more widely avail-
able for the less disaggregated classes of. activity, and therefore most
published data are for one-digit SIC divisions and two-digit industries,
*OMB.  Standard Industrial Classification Manual, 1972,
                                    I.H-3

-------
APPENDIX I.J:  Explanation of Figure 7, "Secondary Impacts Assessment
               Flowchart"
     Figures J-l, J-2, and J-3* provide a progressively more detailed model
of secondary impacts.  Figure J-l shows the simplest possible sequence for
tracing the social and environmental effects of economic activity.  A facility,
because of its employment demands, induces population growth in the impact area;
increased population may, in turn, require expansion of, local residential
housing, which results in a number of site and infrastructure impacts.  Finally,
expansion of residential land use has a number of environmental effects, due
either to the generation of residuals (pollution), or to physical changes to
land, such as impingement on sensitive areas or dislocation of wildlife habitat.

     This flow diagram, although simplified, forms the model for the more com-
plete process described in Figures J-2 and J-3.  In each of these diagrams, the
following conventions are used in relation to the assessment of secondary
impacts:

     o  Social and resource impacts are shown as inherent in changes to
        local land use.  Social impacts include the stress of assimilation
        of new populations, the need to change established institutions to
        accommodate new social groups, and other largely unquantifiable
        impacts that are of greatest significance to the community.
        Resource impacts include water, energy, and other infrastructure
        requirements of new development, as well as general land alloca-
        tion problems, e.g., daes new residential development conflict
        with current zoning designations?  These resource impacts are
        subject to fairly direct quantification and are significant primar-
        ily at the community level, although elements such as energy demand
        may have more regional significance.

     o  Environmental impacts are shown as consequent to land reallocation
        or development.  Once residential development has progressed,
        various environmental problems may occur.  EPA is a concerned party
        in all of these areas (Blocks 7 to 11 of Figure J-3) although other
        Federal agencies may have a significant role in assessing these
        impacts.

     There are some simplifications inherent in this labelling convention.  For
example, increased air and water pollution may significantly change the aesthetic
aspects of the local environment, and thus be perceived as a social impact as
well as an environmental impact.  Also, sometimes resource impacts and environ-
mental impacts are hard to distinguish:  allocation of land has social signifi-
cance to a community, and is thus treated as a resource problem, but part of the
land being allocated may be legally sensitive, resulting in environmental impacts
as well.  Overall, however, the labeling conventions represent the principal
categories of impacts.
*Figure J-3 is identical to Figure 7 in Chapter 4, Level C.
                                     I. J-l

-------
Block A:  Main Population
          Change Sequence
          (Residential Based)
              New

             Source
            Local
         Population
           Change
        Residential
           Growth
        (Social and
          Resource
          Impacts)
       Environmental
          Effects
      (Pollution and
      Other Physical
       Impacts from
        Residential
          Sites)
Block B:   Indirect Industrial
          Employment Effects
 Indirect
 Employment
 Effects
 (Social and Re-
 Source Impacts)
Environmental
Effects
(Pollution and
Other Physical
Effects from
Industrial
Sites)
Block C:  Service Employment Effects
                                      Service Sector
                                      Growth
                                      (Social and
                                      Resource
                                      Impacts)
                  -*., Environmental
                     Effects
                     (Pollution and
                     Other Physical
                     Effects from
                     Commercial/
                     Institutional
                     Sites)
           Figure j-2. Comprehensive secondary impacts flowchart.
                                  I.J-3

-------
                        1.
                       2.
                              New Source
                                Direct
                             Employment
                                                   BLOCK Bi   INDIRECT  INDUSTRIAL EMPLOYMENT EFFECTS
                                                                                                15.
                                                                      13.
                                               li.
 Indirect
Enployment
                                                                       14.
                                                                                                L.
                                                                           u a
       Exogenous
        Factors
       Exogenous
        Factors
s.
         sle*
      7.
                        3.
                       4.
£l]  toesl   Pojx»UU^»*i
£«
                               Qrwth
                       6.
                                               16.
                                               17.
                BLOCK A:   MAIN POPULATION CHANGE
                          SEQUENCE  (RESIDENTIAL)
    Sito




Air





8.





Water

. 9.





Noise

10.




Pesti-
cides
                           • Social, economic; and resource-related impact areasi  These are generally of
                             primary concern to communities and states.
                              figure J- 3.   secoHMur IMPACTS EVALUATION FLOM CHART.
                                                 I.J-4

-------
     Figure J-l covers only the residentially-related secondary impacts of
indirect and service employment induced by a facility.  Figure J-2 contains
additional detail for these two elements.

     Indirect industrial employment (Block B) adds some social and resource
impacts associated with the creation in the impact area of other facilities
which supply inputs to or purchase materials from the facility.  Some environ-
mental impacts may be associated with the pollution and other physical effects
at the sites of these facilities.  However, the impacts of indirect industrial
employment are primarily traced through the main population change sequence
shown in Figure J-l.  The environmental effects associated with the indirect
industrial employment are considered in the user manual only in the case of a
known colocating industry.

     Service employment (Block C) can also affect local population levels, and
thus these environmental impacts should be handled through the main population
change sequence of Figure J-l.  Additional service employment may translate into
new commercial sites, such as shopping centers, and these would have various
physical impacts of their own.  As discussed in the user manual, most of the
environmental impacts of commercial expansion can be either discounted as quali-
tatively insignificant relative to those impacts considered in the main popula-
tion change sequence, or are actually accounted for elsewhere in the impact
assessment process  (vehicle air pollution from shopping centers, for instance,
is more easily accounted for by attributing it to a residentially-based auto
trip.)

     Figure J-3 shows a detailed version of Figure J-2, and includes some simple
information on the causal sequence of secondary impacts.  The main additions
are:  (1) the inclusion of employment as the principal intervening variable
between the facility and expected local population growth; (2) the addition of
exogenous factors, such as local prevailing wage rates or employment levels,
that affect the amount of employment supplied by the local population, as
opposed to inmigrants; (3) the addition of various exogenous considerations,
such as availability of developable land, that influence residential growth
following population growth; and (4) the separate identification of site
requirements and infrastructure requirements as intervening variables between
growth in a particular land use sector and eventual physical environmental
impacts,  in addition, the categories of physical environmental impacts have
been named.  The category of sensitive areas subsumes effects on endangered
species, wildlife habitat, coastal zones, and historic and archaeological
preservation sites.

     We have distinguished site requirements from infrastructure requirements
in order to clarify the social and economic consequences of expansion of a par-
ticular land use type, and to make sure that all of the causal links between
expansion of that land use and secondary physical environmental impacts are
considered.  In evaluating the site requirements of residential growth, coloca-
tion of industry, or commercial development, it is proper to consider zoning,
relationship to existing development, taxation effects, and other site-specific
factors that are of social or economic significance.  It is also essential to
evaluate air pollution (e.g., generation of air pollution from furnaces), water
pollution (e.g., runoff, or septic tank failure), solid waste  (disposal of
cleared vegetation, or different solid waste generation rates for different
densities or types of land use), and other physical environmental factors.
                                      I.J-5

-------
     In evaluating the infrastructure requirements of land use changes, the
reviewer must consider the cost of providing municipal services  (e.g., sewerage,
roads, water, schools, fire protection, police), as well as the environmental
effects associated with various classes of infrastructure (e.g., runoff from
roads, or additional loads on treatment plants for sewered communities.)

     The user manual developed in this contract discusses the methodological
issues associated with individual sections of the Figure J-3 flowchart, and
proposes specific analytic procedures for each section.  These procedures are
incorporated into a three-level assessment and screening framework which pro-
vides , depending upon the potential for secondary impacts, an increasingly
detailed environmental review.

     Figures J-2 and J-3 indicate why secondary impacts are important, and
why the assessment of them is so complex.  Residential growth attributable to
a facility can have a fundamental effect on land, use patterns in the community,
leading to unanticipated secondary physical effects.  In addition, the new
population associated with this residential growth may exceed the capacity of
available infrastructure, leading again to dramatic physical effects as well
as a reduction in the quality-of-life.
                                        I.J-6

-------
                    APPENDIX II.A:  INFRASTRUCTURE STANDARDS


     The standards presented in this section are extracted primarily from:

     •     Appendix A of the Economic/Demographic Assessment
           Manual, prepared by Mountain West Research  (1), and

     •     Urban Planning and Design Criteria, by Lee Koppelman
           and Joseph DeChiara  (11)

The standards in the first source were compiled by the Real Estate Research
Corporation for Argonne National Laboratory^ and for the U.S. Department
of Housing and Urban Development.  We emphasize that these standards are
highly generalized.  You should make every effort to determine applicable
state and local standards.   The guidelines presented here are relevant
particularly in revealing types of facilities and infrastructure that should
be considered, and in estimating orders of magnitude for adequate service
standards.

     The standards presented in the tables consider:

     •     water supply and treatment

     •     waste water treatment

     •     solid waste generation and disposal

     •     police protection

     •     fire protection

     •     health care facilities

     •     educational facilities

     •     recreational facilities

     •     libraries

     •     commercial facilities

     •     roads and highways.
                                   II.A-1

-------
For some categories, we have included at least two sets of recommended
standards, which can be used to define a range.  In addition, for certain
categories a simple standard is provided, as well as more detailed standards
which correspond to specific dwelling unit densities, or types of establish-
ments, or other characteristics.

Water Supply S Treatment

     Surface water generally requires treatment, so treatment capacity is the
limiting factor for water supply.  If groundwater is the supply source and
only chlorination or other minimal treatment's practiced, it is the capa-
bility of the source itself which limits water supply.

     Table II-l  gives average per capita water usage broken down by type of
use.  Peak usage is normally assumed to be three times average use.   Based
on these consumption figures, the water supply standard is .20 acre-feet per
person per year.  If the water comes from a stream or well,  1600 gallons per
day per connection represents adequate stream flow.

     Table II-2 provides information on total daily water requirements per
100 acres of residential development, assuming different population densities.
For various types of activity,  average  water use in gallons per day is shown
in Table II-3.

     Water treatment plants should be designed to process 115% of the  peak
water usage of the service population.  Table II-4 provides information on
the amount and size of pipe for adequate water distribution, assuming differ-
ent housing densities.

      (This section is based on data provided by {2),  (4), (5), (6), and (11)).

Wastewater Treatment

     In small isolated communities and rural areas,  wastewater treatment
plants are often unnecessary as individual septic tanks are adequate to
treat water.  For such a system to be feasible, the soils must be suitable
and the septic tanks must be properly maintained.  When these criteria are
not met, or when the area is densely populated, a central wastewater treat-
ment system should be built.  Where land is readily available and inexpensive
in small communities, a secondary lagoon or series of lagoons may be adequate.
An average lagoon size is 10 acres per 1,000 people.

     For larger communities, secondary or tertiary treatment may be needed.
Table II-5 displays sewage generation rates for commercial and public estab-
lishments.  A capacity of one million GPD is considered minimum for a
secondary or tertiary sewage treatment plant, based on a peak of 168 GPCD.
The minimum number of employees required to operate such a plant in a small
community is 6.5 persons, while standard employment for a plant in a commun-
ity of 30,000 to 100,000 is 4.5 to 16 persons.  Table II-6 shows the
necessary length and type of pipe required for various housing types.

      (This section is based on information from (2),  (6), and (7)).
                                    II.A-2

-------
Solid Waste Disposal

     Although standards vary, most states require sanitary landfill sites for
all communities.  Several communities within a region may share a landfill
site, depending on community size.  On the assumptions that 4 to 5 pounds of
waste per capita is generated daily, that the waste is compacted, that
the fill depth is seven feet, and that 2/3 of the site is covered by solid
waste, .21 acres maximum per 1,000 persons is needed each year for sanitary
landfill.

     You may wish to calculate solid waste generation on a household basis.
A general assumption about these rates is:

     •    first adult in household - 6.5 pounds

     •    succeeding adults - 2.5 pounds each

     •    children - 1.5 pounds each.

     Table II-7 details the vehicle use and employment necessary to collect
solid waste.  The increased efficiency of collection vehicles in larger
communities reveals that it may be more practical for residents in smaller
communities to haul their own garbage to the landfill site.

      (This section is based on information from  (2) and  (6)).

Police Protection

     The standard number of policemen and patrol cars per 1,000 people vary
with community size.  For smaller communities, 1.4 to 3 officers per thousand
is sufficient, while larger communities require a higher ratio.  Depending
on the needs of the area and the number of shifts operated, patrol cars may
be allocated to patrolmen ranging from a one-to-one basis to one-to-three
basis.

     One central police station is generally adequate for a town with a
population of less than 30,000, while larger towns may require branch
stations.  Approximatley 200 square feet of office space is needed for each
patrolman.  The need for a central dispatcher arises in towns with a popula-
tion of 5,000 or greater.

      (This section is based on information from  (2) and  (6)).

Fire Protection

     The National Board of Fire Underwriters sets specific standards for
communities of  30,000 persons or more.  Required fire flow for a community
is computed with detailed information on the site and structural character-
istics of the communities' buildings.  A general rule of thumb for fire flow
requirements, however, is presented in Table II-8.  The size of each station
should be a minimum of 5,000 square feet and serve an area with a radius of
                                    II.A-3

-------
two to six miles.  Two pumpers, a staff car, and an ambulance are basic
equipment for towns with a population of less than 30,000 people.  Volunteer
firemen are sufficient for towns of fewer than 10,000 people, provided the
standard of 20 volunteer firemen are available for the operation of each
pumper.  For larger communities, two full time firemen per 1,000 dwellings
is appropriate.  For major cities, the requirement increases to five firemen
per thousand dwellings.

      (This section is based on information from (2),  (6),  (8), and (9)).

Health Care Facilities

     A recommended minimum for health care professionals is one doctor and
.5 dentists per 1,000 people.  In rural areas, general practioners will be
most common, while specialists will most likely practice at regional
hospitals.  The following formulas are used to calculate hospital bed needs:

      (1)  Current use rate »
              Patient days per year * current population

      (2)  Average bed need per day =
               (Current use rate x projected population) *  365

      (3)  Bed Need -
              Average bed need per day * .80 (assumed occupancy rate)

     The required space for all services provided in a hospital is shown in
Table I1-9.

      (This section is based on information from (2),  (6),  and  (9)).

Recreation

     Table 11-10 provides standards for a variety of recreational activities
and recreational areas, including information on space, size, and service
radius.  Tables 11-11 and 11-12, which rely on a different source, provide
a slightly different estimate of adequacy and service characteristics.  The
two sources together define a suitable range for recreation standards.

     Maintenance for playgrounds and parks depends largely on the size of the
facilities and the climate.  In areas where cold winters render parks inopera-
tive, the maintenance is less than for those parks in year-round use.  Table
11-13 shows approximate maintenance needs for communities  of various sizes.

      (This section is based on information  from (2),  (6),  and  (11)).

Libraries

     A general description of library characteristics is given in Figure II-14,
with  standards for number of volumes given  in the next figure.  The minimum
book  stock of any library, as an independent unit, should  be 6,000 volumes
                                     II.A-4

-------
regardless of population served.

     The Public Library Association approves the standards in Table 11-16
for small libraries.  In addition, it is estimated that seating for 20
persons is necessary for libraries serving less than 3,000 people and five
additional seats are required per each successive 1,000 people served.  Table
11-17 and Table 11-18 set guidelines for library periodical collections and
operating hours.  A minimum of one professional is necessary for each
1,500 persons served, as well as one non-professional for every four profes-
sionals.  Parking needs are estimated as one space for every 2 workers and
one space for every 4 seats in rooms of public assembly.

     (This section is based on information from (2), (6), (10) and  (11)).

Schools

     Table 11-19 lists pupil generation rates by type of dwelling unit.  You
may use these if you have specific information about the typology of new
dwelling units in the impact area.

     Tables 11-20 to 11-23 provide data concerning the general requirements
of nursery, elementary, junior high, and senior high schools, respectively.
In smaller communities, some of these requirements, particularly service
radius and minimum pupil size, will have to be relaxed.

     A classroom or its equivalent should be available for each teacher in
elementary school.  Ninety  (90) square feet per pupil is recommended - this
includes all space, including teaching and administrative, library, recrea-
tional areas, etc.  Administrative staff size  (principals, librarians,
counselors) is dependent on pupil size.  The U.S. Department of Health
and Human Services suggests one staff member for every eight teachers.
In small schools, administrative staff may consist only of a principal or
a half-time principal with teaching responsibilities.

     Recommended minimum square footage per pupil for secondary schools is
150 square feet.  Again, the standards shown are not feasible for smaller
communities.

     Secondary schools often provide extensive recreational facilities for
students.  In small communities, municipal facilities can be built  at the
school so that the town and the school district can share both the  costs
and benefits of the facilities.  The same ratio of staff to teachers applies
as in elementary schools, with  a typical breakdown as shown in Table 11-24.

      (This section is based on  information from  (2),  (6),  (11) and  (12)).

Roads and Highways

     Residential growth attributable to the new source may result in a need
for new roads or highways.  The general features of these facilities are

-------
provided in Table 11-25,  as a guide to the potential impacts of their con-
struction.

     (This section is based on information from  (11)).

Shopping Centers

     The development of a new shopping center entails considerable space
requirements, as outlined in Table 11-26.  New residential growth does not
imply shopping center growth, if existing facilities are adequate — the
guidelines in the table can be used to judge this adequacy.

     (This section is based on information from  (11)).

-------
                            TABLE II-l
                      NORMAL WATER CONSUMPTION

Domestic use
Commercial, industrial use
Public use
Miscellaneous use
TOTAL
Average
50 gpd
65 gpd
10 gpd
25 gpd
150 gpd
Normal Range
15
10
5
10
40
- 70 gpd
- 100 gpd
- 20 gpd
- 40 gpd
- 230 gpd
Source:  Pair, Geyer, and Okun, Water Supply and Wastewater
         Removal, (New York, 1966), as cited in Argonne
         National Laboratory,  A Framework for Projecting
         Employment and Population Changes Accompanying
         Energy Development, Phase II.  August 1976, p. 48.

-------
                                TABLE II-2
            REQUIRED WATER SUPPLY FOR DOMESTIC USE S FIRE FLOW
  Population
   Density(1)
  (per acre)
Average
 Daily
 (gpcd)
Water Use:
Acre-Ft.(2)
 per 1000
Population
   Total Daily Water
   Requirements per
     100 Acres of
Residential Development
Less than 1 d.u.    300

1 - 2.9 d.u.        225

3 - 4.9 d.u.        190

5-15 d.u.         150

Over 15 d.u.        125
               .92

               .69

               .58

               .46

               .38
                                             Average Day
                                               Max. Day
                                           1000 gal.  Ac.Ft.   1000 gal. Ac.Ft,
                                                                               (3)
               57

              171

              253

              455

              950
      .18

      .53

      .78

     1.40

     2.92
 171

 513

 759

1365

2850
 .54

1.59

2.34

4.20

8.76
(1)  Assumes 3.8 persons per dwelling unit  (d.u.)

(2)  One acre-foot equals 325,830 gallons

(3)  Equals three times average daily consumption
Source:  Joseph DeChiara and Lee Koppelman.  Urban Planning and Design
         Criteria.  2nd Edition, New York, Van Nostrand & Reinhold,  1975,
                                    II.A^S

-------
                               TABLE II-3

                AVERAGE WATER USE  BY TYPE OF ESTABLISHMENT
           Type of Establishments                              Gallons
_.	per Day
 Airports (per passenger)                                         3-5
 Apartments, multiple family (per resident)                       60
 Bathhouses (per bather)                                           10
 Camps:
     Construction, semipermanent (per worker)                     50
     Day with no meals served (per camper)                        15
     Luxury (per camper)                                        100-150
     Resorts,  day and night, with limited plumbing
       (per camper)                                                50
     Tourist with central bath and toilet facilities
       (per person)                                                35
 Cottages with seasonal occupancy (per resident)                  50
 Courts,  tourist with individual bath units  (per person)          5.0
 Clubs:
     Country (per resident member)                                100
     Country (per nonresident member present)                     25
 Dwellings:
     Boardinghouses  (per boarder)                                  50
      Additional kitchen requirements for nonresident
      boarder                                                    10
     Luxury (per person)                                        100-150
     Multiple family apartments (per resident)                     40
     Rooming houses  (per resident)                                 60
     Single family (per resident)                                50-75
 Estates  (per resident)                                         100-150
 Hotel with private  baths  (2 persons per room)                     60
 Hotels without private baths (per person)                        50
 Institutions  other  than hospitals (per person)                  75-125
     Hospitals (per  bed)                                        250-400
 Laundries,  self-serviced  (gallons per washing;
    i.e.,  per  customer)                                            50

-------
                            Table II-3 (cont.)

      Type of Establishment                                    Gallons
	.	per day
 Livestock (per animal):
     Cattle (drinking)                                             12
     Dairy (drinking and  servicing)                                35
     Goat (drinking)                                                2
     Hog (drinking)                                                 4
     Horse (drinking)                                              12
     Mule (drinking)                                               12
     Sheep (drinking)                                               2
     Steer (drinking)                                              12
 Motels with bath,  toilet,  and kitchen facilities
   (per bed space)                                                 50
     With bed and toilet (per bed space)                           40
 Parks:
     Overnight with flush toilets (per camper)                     25
     Trailers with individual baths units (per camper)            50
 Picnic:
     With bath houses,  showers, and flush toilets
       (per picknicker)                                            20
     With toilet facilities only (gallons per picnicker )          lo
 Poultry:
     Chickens (per 100)                                           5-10
     Turkeys (per 100)                                           10-18
 Restaurants with toilet facilities (per patron)                 7-10
     Without toilet facilities (per patron)                      21j-3
     With bars and cocktail lounge (additional quantity
       per patron)                                                 2
 Schools:
     Boarding (per pupil)                                        75~100
     Day with cafeteria,  gymnasiums, and showers (per pupil)      25
     Day with cafeteria but no gymnasiums or showers  (per pupil)  20
     Day without cafeteria, gymnasiums, or showers  (per pupil)    15
 Service stations (per vehicle)                                   10
 Stores (per toilet room)                                        400
 Swimming pools (per swimmer)                                     10
                                  II.A-10

-------
                                 TABLE II-3  (cont.)
          Type of  Establishments                                   Gallons
          	per day
      Theaters:
          Drive-in  (per car space)                                     5

          Movie  (per  auditorium seat)                                  5

     Workers:
          Construction (per person per'shift)                        50

          Day  (school or offices per person per shift)               15
Source: Environmental  ftpal-hh Pyagl-ifna in R«sr!T*faa'hiona1 Arg»aa-f Public. Health
Service, U.S. Department of Health,  Education & Welfare.
                                      II.A-11

-------
                                 TABLE II-4

             BASIC WATER DISTRIBUTION STANDARDS BY HOUSING TYPE
                          (per 1,000 Dwelling Units)
47,500' of total pipe
comprised of:
35%
35%
20%
10%
           6"
          10"
          15"
          24"
                      52,000 of total pipe
                      comprised of:
                                                         SF.
                      Individuals Wells
35%
35%
20%
10%
 6"
10"
15"
24"
       SF
Individual Wells
                  Townhouse

               23,000' of total
               pipe comprised of:

                  35% -  6"
                  35% -' 10"
                  20% - 15"
                  10% - 24"
          Walkups
         15,500 of total
         pipe comprised of:
                                          35%
                                          35%
                                          20%
                                          10%
                   8"
                  12"
                  15"
                  24"
                        Mid-Rise

                        8,000 of total
                        pipe comprised of;
                           35% -  8"
                           35% - 12"
                           20% - 15"
                           10% - 24"
Key:  SF,
      SF,
      SF.
          65% conventional single-family at 3 units per acre, 35% single-
          family clustered at 5 units per acre. (Overall density - 3.7
          units per acre).
          90% conventional single family at 3 units per acre, 10% single-
          family clustered at 5 units per acre.  (Overall density - 3.2
          units per acre).
          single-family (conventional)  at 0.5 units per acre.

          single-family (clustered)  at 1.0 unit  per acre.
      TH   »  Townhouses at 10 units per acre.
      WU   -  Walkups at 15 units per acre.
      MR   •  Mid-rises at 30 units per acre.

Source:  Real Estate Research Corporation as cited in:  Argonne National
         Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting Employment and Population
         Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II. August 1376—
         prepared for the U.S. Energy Research Development Administration,
         p. 44.
                                   II.A-12

-------
                                 TABLE II-5

                          SEWAGE GENERATION RATES FOR
                     COMMERCIAL AND PUBLIC ESTABLISHMENTS
Hotels
Motels
Restaurants  (toilet and kitchen wastes per patron)
    Additional for bars and cocktail lounges
Tourist courts with individual bath units
Luxury camps
Camps
Day camps  (no meals)
Day schools  (with cafeterias, showers)
Boarding schools
Day workers at schools or offices
Hospitals
Other institutions
Factory workers  (per shift)
Picnic parks (with bathhouses and showers)
Swimming pools and bathhouses
Drive-in theaters (per car space)
Theaters (per seat)
Places of assembly
Airports (per passenger)
Self-service laundries  (per wash)
Stores (per toilet room)
 Gallons Per Person
	Per Day	

  50 to 150
  50 to 125
   7 to 10
   2
  50 to 120
 100 to 150
  25 to 40
  15
  15 to 25
  75 to 100
  12 to 35*
 150 to 250 or more
  75 to 125
  15 to 35
  10
  10
   5 to 10
   5
   3 to 10
   3 to 5
   50
  400
   10
Hotels
Office buildings
Department stores
Agartment hotels
 Gallons  Per Day
  1,000 sq.  ft.

  600  to  1,100
  100  to   500
  100  to   400
  200  to   400
Light industry
Hotels, stores, and office buildings
Markets, warehouses, wholesale establishments
High-cost residential
Medium-cost residential
Low-cost residential
 Gallons  Per Day
    Per Acre	

     14,000
     60,000
     15,000
      7,500
      8,000
     16,000
Source:  Sigurd Grave, Urban Planning Aspects of Water Pollution Control
         (Columbia University Press, New York 1969), as cited in Argonne
         National Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting Employment and
         Population Cnanges Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II,
         August 1976, prepared for the U.S. Energy Research Development
	Administration, p. 49.

-------
                                 TABLE II-6
                   BASIC SWAGE STANDARDS BY HOUSING TYPE3
                         (Per 1,000 Dwelling Units)
                                                    SF.
                   SF,
47,500' of total pipe
comprised of:
    70% -  8"
    20% - 15"
    10% - 30"

      Townhouse
23,000* of total pipe
comprised of:
    70% -  8"
    20% - 15"
    10% - 30"
                         52,000*of total pipe
                         comprised of:
                             70% -  8"
                             20% - 15"
                             10% - 30"

                                Walkup
                          13,500' of total pipe
                          comprised of:
                              70% -  8"
                              20% - 15"
                              10% - 30"
Septic Tank    Septic Tank
         Mid-Rise
   8,000' of total pipe
   comprised of:
       70% -  8"
       20% - 15"
       10% - 30"
 See Table II"4 for key to symbols.
Source:  Real Estate Research Corporation as cited in:  Argonne National
         Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting Employment and Population
         Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II, August 1976,
         prepared for the U.S. Energy Research Development Administration,
         p. 46.
                                   II. AT-14

-------
                                                  TABLE II-7
                                         SOLID WASTE SERVICE STANDARDS
    Suburb or Fringe
    Independent Outlying
    Community
                           Moderate Urban
                        (30,000 to 100,000)
                     1 collection vehicle  serves
                     about 3,200 dwelling units:
                     1,000 units=31% of 1 truck;
                     1,938 man-hours per year per
                     1,000 dwelling units

                                 NA
H
M
01
Dependent Outlying
Community
                                     NA
    Non^Urban
                                 NA
    NA = Not Applicable
     Small Urban
  (10,000 to 30,000)

1 collection vehicles serves
about 3,100 dwelling units:
1,000 units=32% of 1 truck;
2,018 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units

1 collection vehicle serves
about 3,050 dwelling units:
1,000 units=33% of 1 truck;
2,040 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units
    Rural Balance
  (less than 10,000)

1 collection vehicle serves
about 3,050 dwelling units:
1,000 units=33% of 1 truck;
2,040 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units

1 collection vehicle serves
about 2,900 dwelling units:
1,000 units=35% of 1 truck;
2,148 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units
1 collection vehicle serves   1 collection vehicle serves
about 3,050 dwelling units:
1,000 units=33% of 1 truck;
2,040 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units

           NA
about 2,900 dwelling units:
1,000 units=35% of 1 truck;
2,148 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units

1 collection vehicle serves
about 1,800 dwelling units:
1,000 unit=55% of 1 truck;
3,475 man-hours per year per
1,000 dwelling units
    Source:   Real Estate  Research Corporation as  cited in:   Arqonne National Laboratory,  A Framework for
             Projecting Employment and Population Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II, August
             1976, prepared  for the U.S.  Energy Research Development Administration,  p.  53.

-------


Population
1,000
1,500
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
10,000
13,000
17,000
22,000
27,000
33,000
40,000
55,000
75,000
95,000
120,000
150,000
200,000
REQUIRED

gmp
1,000
1,250
1,500
1,750
2,000
2,250
2,500
3,000
3,500
4,000
4,500
5,000
5,500
6,000
7,000
8,000
9,000
10,000
11,000
12,000
Over 2,000 population, 12,000
for a second fire,
mgd - millions of
Source: De Chiara
New Yorfc,
TABLE II- 8
I
FIRE FLOW, BY POPULATION

mgd
1.44
1.80
2.16
2.52
2.88
3.24
3.60
4.32
5.04
5.76
6.48
7.20
7.92
8.64
10.08
11.52
12.96
14.40
15.84
17.28
gpm, with 2,
Duration j
hours
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
000 to 8,000 gpm additional
for a 10-hour duration.
gallons per
day.
, Joseph, and Koppelman,
New York:
Van Nostrand

Lee. op.cit.
S Reinhold Co. , 197R.
11. A*-16

-------
                                  TABLE II-9

                     SPACE CRITERIA FOR HOSPITAL EVALUATION
                         (In Gross Square Feet per Bed)
      Department               100-Beds     200-Beds     300-Beds     400-Beds

 1.  Nursing  Services           362-439      356-432      351-427     355-441
    a. Bed Units             .  290-350      290-350      290-350     300-370
    b. Operating  Suite          44-  54       41-  51       39-  49      36-  46
    c. Delivery Suite           18-  20       16-  18       14-  16      12-  14
    d. Emergency  Suite          10-  15        9-  13        8-  12       7-  11

 2*  Professional  Services       60-  81       57-  74       53-  72      49-  67
    a. Laboratories             22-  28       21-  27       20-  26      20-  26
    b. X-Ray                   24-  32       24-  30       22-  28      21-  27
    c. Physical Therapy          8-  12        7-  10        8-  12       7-11
    d. Pharmacy                 6-9        6-8        5-8       4-7

 3*  SuPPortive  Services        164-199      151-183      140-168     130-157
    a. Food  Service             45-  50       42-  47       39-  44      36-  41
    b. Housekeeping              4-7        4-5        3-4       2-3
    c. Laundry                  15-  17       12-  14       12-  14      11-  13
    d. Sterile  Supply           10-  13        9-  12        8-  11       7-  10
    e. Central  Stores           25-  35       25-  35       24-  32       23-  30
    f. Employee Facilities      13-  17       12-  15       10-  12        9-  11
    g. Shops and Mechanicals    52-  60       47-  55       44-  51       42-  49
4-  Administrative Services    60- 70      55- 65      52- 63      48- 59
    a. Offices                 34- 39      31- 36      30- 36
    b. Medical Records         10- 11      10- 11       9- 10
    c. Public Space             8- 10       7-9       7-9
    d. Volunteers' Space        8- 10       7-9       6-8

         TOTAL HOSPITAL       646-789     620-755     598-732

5.  Outpatient Suite            0- 40       0- 45       0- 50
Source:  Space Criteria for Hospital Evaluation, Hospital Planning Council of
         Metropolitan Chicago, Chicago Hospital Planning Council, 1965, as
         cited in Argonne National Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting
         Employment and Population Changes Accompanying Energy Development,
         Phase II, August 1976, prepared for the U.S. Energy Research
         Development Administration, p. 59.

-------


A. Standards for Recreational Ai-tivi t i> 'n
Type of Recroat imial Activity
Active Recreation
1. Children's Play Area
(with equipment)
2. Field Play Areas for Vomtg Children
3. Older Children-Adult field Spoils
Activities
4. Tennis, Outdoor Basket In 1 1,
other Outdoor S|wrts
5. Stflnning
6. Major Boating Activities
7: Hiking-Camping-Horseback ftidinq-
Nature Study
6. Golfing

Passive Recreation
I. Picnicking
2. Passive Hater Sports
Fi shlng-Rowi ng-Canno 1 ng
3. Zoos, Arboretums, Botanical cinrrtcns
Other
1. Parking at Recreational Areau
2. Indoor Recreation Centevs
3. Outdoor Theatres, Band SlielJs
B. Standards for Recreation An><»s


Playgrounds
Neighborhood Parks
Playfields
Corammity Parks
District Parks
Regional Parks and Res^rv.-if ionr;
TAIII.R 11-10
STANDARDS FOR RBL'RKATriWAI, AOTlVITTRf

Activity Por Piipiil ,it inn ltii|ni ro,| foi Activity

0.5 ai-»e/ l.ooo pop. ' '"""•
l.S ,•>, res/1 ,001) ,.op. ' •v'rr>!1
1.5 acres/I, OOO pop. IS '"''cs
l.O acres/5, tX» |iotv. •* •1r:1'ea
1 outdoor pool/25.000 r.^K-.i! io,, -,ixU pl,,s «.-»ll,«i fKX.I
2 .11-1 OS
100 acres/50,000 IO" iiri:M i>1") over
10 acres/1. 000 pop. n,,,,- , ,noo ac.cs
I 18-hole co*irsp \^GT
5O.OOO |>op.
4 acres/1, OOO pop. v.n IPH
1 l*ike or (wiqot>n prr '" r p w'~*ror area
25.OOO |X>(..
1 acre/1,000 l«p. |n<1 •1|irns
1 acre/1,000 pop. v'lf ies
1 acre/IO,W>O |»->|i. '"''' i":"'s
1 acre/25, 000 p(nl rlct ink

All ]
-------
                                 TABLE 17-11

                         MINIMUM RECREATION STANDARDS
  Facility

Play lot

Playground

Neighborhood
  Park

Playfield
Ages Served

Pre-school

  5-14


All ages

Teenage and
  Adult
Community Park   All ages
Acres of  Service
 Space     Radius

  1/8     1 block

   3      1/2 mile


   2      1/2 mile

            City
  12     (Community)

  30        City
         (Community)
 One Acre Serves
Total Population of;

      800

    1,000


      800


      800


      250
A minimum suggested for separate playground serving small communities:

            Population              Children           Number of Acres

              2,000                    450                  3.25

              3,000                    600                  4.0

              4,000                    800                  5.0

              5,000                  1,000                  6.0

              per 50,000 persons
                  25 miles of hiking trails

                  25 miles of cycling trails

                   5 miles of bridle trails
Source:  National Park and Recreation Association, as cited in Interim Guide
         for Environmental Assessment, U.S.  Department of Housing s Urban
         Development.

-------
                                  TABLE II-12


              RECREATION DEMAND FOR  SPECIFIC  TYPES OF FACILITIES
          Specific Activity                  Average Population Served

          Swimming pool                   3 percent of population at a given
                                          time with 12 square feet of water
                                          per swimmer

          Golf  (18-hole)                  50,000

          Recreation Building
          (1-3 acres)                     20,000

          Tennis courts                   1 court per 2,000

          Baseball                        1 diamond per 6,000

          Softball                        1 diamond per 3,000
Source:  National Park and Recreation Association, as cited in Interim Guide
         for Environmental Assessment, U.S.  Department of Housing and Urban
         Development.
                                   II.A-20

-------
                             TABLE riV
          MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR PARKS AND PLAYGROUNDS
  Community
    Size
10,000 - 30,000


30,000 - 100,000


> 100,000
  Full-Time
   Workers

(per.thousand/
  population)
  0,3 - 0,45
   .5 -  .6
   .6 - 1.0
 Part-Time-
  Workers

(per  thousand
 population)
    2,4
    1.5
                                II,-Ar21

-------
     TYPE
    AREA
   SERVED
                                     POPULATION
                                       SERVED
                                      MISCELLANEOUS
  CENTRAL
    or
   MAIN
 Whole City
     or
Municipality
  No  Limit  &
   Varies
Should be within a block
or two of main business &
shopping area S convenient
to main traffic & trans-
portation arteries.
  BRANCH
1 to l«j Miles
Minimum  is
from  25,000
' to 55,000
  People
Should be easily access-
ible.  These requirements
are for cities of 100,000
people or more.
SUB-BRANCH
Detached Areas
      &
Smaller Cities
                                      Varies
              Frequently not open every
              day or housed in a library-
              owned building.  Can be in
              community buildings or
              schools or rented quarters.
Source:  Koppelman and DeChiara, op. cit.
             FIGURE 11^14: Description of Library Characteristics
                                   II.A-22

-------
POPULATION OF LIBRARY AREA
Minimum Maximum
6,000 10,000
10,000 35,000
35,000 100,000
100,000 200,000
200,000 1,000,000
Over 1,000,000
Volumes
per Capita
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.75
1.5
1.0
' Maximum number of
Volumes
25,000
70,000
175,000
300,000
1,000,000

Source:  Koppelmari and De Chiara, op, cit.
                FIGURE  H-15: General Standards for  Libraries
                                     II.A"-23

-------
                                 TABLE TJ-16

                       GUIDELINES FOR SMALL LIBRARIES
Population Served   Size of Book Collection
Under 2,500

 2,500 - 4,999



 5,000 - 9,999



10,000 - 24,999



25,000 - 49,999
10,000 volumes

10,000 volumes plus 3 books
per capita for population
over" 3,500

15,000 volumes plus 2 books
per capita for population
over 5,000

2,000 volumes plus 2 books
per capita for population
over 10,000

50,000 volumes plus 2 books
per capita for population
over 25,000
Total Floor Space

2,000 square feet

2,500 square feet or
0.7 sq. ft. per capita,
whichever is greater

3,500 square feet or
0.7 sq. ft. per capita,
whichever is greater

7,000 sq. ft. or 0.7 sq.
ft. per capita, whichever
is greater

15,000 square feet or
0.6 sq. ft. per capita,
whichever is greater
Source:  Public Library Association.  Interim Standard for Small Public
         Libraries;  Guidelines Toward Achieving the Goals of Public
         Library Service.

-------
                                 TABLE 11-17

                    GUIDELINES FOR PERIODICAL COLLECTIONS
     Population             Number of Publications        Back Files Kept


  Less than 5,000.                 50-75                  1-5 years


  5,000 - 9,999                   75  - 125                  1-10 years


  10,000 - 24,999                125  - 200                  5-10 years


  25,000 - 49,999                200  - 250                  5 - 10 years


  50,000 or more                 250 or more                10 *• 25 years
Source:  Real Estate Research Corporation as cited in:  Argonne National
         Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting Employment and Population
         Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II, August 1976.
         prepared for the U.S. Energy Research Development Administration
         p. 76,
                                    II.A-^25

-------
                                TABLE 11-18 •                                 |
                                                                             i
                   STANDARDS FOR LIBRARY OPERATING HOURS                     I
            Population                           Hours Open


          Under 5,000                         20 hours per week



          5,000 - 9,999                       45-50 hours per week



          10,000 - 24,999                     50 - 68 hours per week



          25,000 and over                     68 or more per week
Source:  Real Estate Research Corporation as cited in:  Argonne National
         Laboratory, A Framework for Projecting Employment and Population
         Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phas? II, August 1976,
         prepared for the U.S. Energy Research Development Administration,
         p. 77.

-------
                                TABLE 11-19

                PUPIL GENERATION RATES BY TYPE OF DWELLING
    Bedroom Type

Garden Apartment
   One-Bedroom
   Two-Bedroom
Townhouses
   Two-Bedroom
   Three-Bedroom
   Four-Bedroom
Highrise
   Studio
   One-Bedroom
 Grade Level
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Kindergarten
Grammar School
High School
Pupil Multiplier
     .005
     ,024
     .017

     .046

     ,032
     .250
     .062
     .344
     ,029
     .134
     .057

     .220
     .097
     .450
     .108

     .655
     .125
     .712
     .189
    1.026
     .000
     .000
     .000

     .000

     .006
     .006
     ,000

     .012
                                   II.A-27

-------
Table II-19 cont.
     Bedroom Type              Grade Level              Pupil Multiplier

Highrise
   Two-Bedroom                Kindergarten                  ,021
                              Grammar School                ,115
                              High School                   ,045
                                                            ,181
Single Family

     Three-bedroom            Kindergarten                  .083
                              Grammar School                ,408
                              High School                   ,135

                                                            .626
     Four-Bedroom             Kindergarten                  ,152
                              Grammar School                .969
                              High School                   ,172
                                                           1.293
Source:  Center for Urban Policy Research, Housing Development and Municipal
         Costs, Rutgers, N.J.i Rutgers University, 1973.

-------
                                             TABLE 11-20
                               GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NURSERY SCHOOLS
Assumed Family Size

Assumed Population
Characteristics

Number of Children of
Nursery School Age
Per Family
Age of Children
Served

Size of Nursery School
Population Served
3.5 persons

60 children of Nursery School age
per 1000 persons or 275-300 families

,20 children
 Area Required
Accessory Facilities
2*5 to 5 years old
Minimum - 4 classes
   (60 children)
Average - 6 classes
   (90 children)
Maximum - 8 classes
  (120 children)
4 classes - 1000 persons
   275-300 families
6 classes - 1500 persons
   425-450 families
8 classes - 2000 persons
   550-600 families
Radius of Area
  Served
                                                             Design Features
                                                             General Location
                                                             Accessory Parking
4 classes - 4000 SF
6 classes - 6000 SF
8 classes - 8000 SF
Playlot for children's
 play area with equip-
 ment.  Play area should
 be completely fenced in
 from other activities.

1-2 blocks - desirable
1/8 mile - maximum
                        Nursery School should be
                         accessible by footpath
                         from dwelling units
                         without crossing any
                         streets.  If street must
                         be crossed it should be
                         minor street

                        Near an Elementary School
                         or Community Center
                        1 space for each 2
                         classes  _
These figures will vary for most areas.  They are based on a full cross-section of the population.
Population figures should be checked for local age distribution and birth trends for any specific
location.
Source:  Koppelman and De Chiara, op. cit.

-------
                                             TABLE 11-21
                               ELEMENTARY SCHOOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Assumed Family Size
Assumed Population
Characteristics
Number of Children of
Elementary School Age
Per Family


Age of Children Served

Size of Elementary
  School
Size of Typical Class
Population Served
3.5 persons
175 children of Elementary School
age per 1000 persons or 275-300
families
,54 children
5 thru 11 years

Minimum - 250 pupils

Average - 800 pupils
Maximum - 1200 pupils


30-32 pupils
Minimum school - 1500 persons
Average School - 5000 persons
Maximum school - 7000 persons
 Area Required
 Accessory
 Facilities
 Radius of
Area Served


Design Features
                                                             General Location
                                                             Accessory Parking
Minimum school - 7-8 acres
Average school - 12-14 acres
Maximum school - 16-18 acres
 •
Playground completely equipped
 for a wide range of activities
Playground area should be
 completely screened from
 street
 1/4 miles - desirable
 1/2 mile - maximum


 Elementary School should be
  accessible by footpath from
  dwelling units without
  crossing any streets.  If
  street must be crossed it
  should be a minor street

  Near center of residential
   area, near or adjacent to
   other community facilities

   One space per class plus
    3 spaces
These figures will vary for most areas.  They are based on a full cross-section of the population.
Population  figures should be checked out for local age distribution and birth trends for any specific
•location.
 Source:   Koppelman and De Chiara, op. cit.

-------
                                             TABLE 11-22
                               JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Assumed Family Size
Assumed Population
Characteristics

Number of Children
of Jr. High School
Age per Family
3.5 persons
  Area Required
75 children of Junior High School
age per 1000 persons ©r 275-300 families
.22 children
Age of Children Served   12 to 14 years
Size of Junior High
School
Size of Typical Class

Population Served
Minimum school - 800 pupils
Average school - 1200 pupils
Maximum school - 1600 pupils


30-32 pupils

Minimum school - 10,000 persons
  2,750 - 3,000 families
Average school - 16,000 persons
  4,500 - 5,000 families
Maximum school - 20,000 persons
  5,800 - 6,000 families
 Accessory
 Facilities

 Radius of
Area Served
Design
Features
                                                               General
                                                               Location

                                                               Accessory
                                                               Parking
Minimum School - 18-20 acres
Average School - 24-26 acres
Maximum School - 30-32 acres
Playground completely
 equipped for a wide range
 of game activities

1/2 mile - desirable
3/4 miles - maximum

School should be away from
 major arterial streets;
 pedestrian walkways from
 other areas should be
 provided
                  Located near concentration
                   of dwelling units or near
                   center of residential area

                  One space per classroom
                   plus six spaces
These figures will vary for most areas.  They are based on a full cross-section of the population.
Population figures should be checked for local age distribution and birth trends for any specific
location.
 Source:  Koppelman and De Chiara, op. cit.

-------
                                            TABLE 11-23
                              SENIOR HIGH SCHOOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Assumed Family Size

Assumed Population
Characteristics
Number of Children of
High School Age Per
Family
Size of High School



Size of Typical Class

Population Served
3.5 persons

75 children of High School age
per 1000 persons or 275 to 300
families

.22 children
                         Area Required
Age of Children Served    15-18 years
Minimum - 1000 pupils
Average - 1800 pupils
Maximum - 2600 pupils

30-35 pupils
                         Accessory
                         Facilities
                                   Radius of
                                  Area Served
                          Design
                         Features
Minimum
  3,800
Average
  6,800
Maximum
  9,800
14,000 persons
4,000 families
24,000 persons
7,000 families
34,000 persons
10,000 families
General
Location
                                                          Accessory Parking
                 Minimum - 32-34 acres
                 Average - 40-42 acres
                 Maximum - 48-5Q acres
                 Playground completely equipped
                  for a wide range of game
                  activities

                 3/4 mile - desirable
                 1 mile - maximum
School should be located
 adjacent to a park area.
 School should be adequately
 screened from noise or objec-
 tionable uses

School should be centrally
 located for easy access.
 Proximity to other community
 facilities is advantageous .

 1 space per classroom plus
 16 spaces
These figures will vary for most areas.  They are based on a full cross-section of the population.
Population figures should be checked for local age distribution and birth trends for any specific
location.
Sources  Koppelman and De Chiara, op. cit.

-------
                                 TABLE 11-24 '

                           SECONDARY SCHOOL STAFF
              Function                        Percent of.Staff


    Principals and Assistants                        37%


    Consultants and Supervisors                      14%


    Librarians                                       16%


    Counselors                                       21%


    Psychological Personnel                           4%


    Other (e.g. audio-visual)                         8%


                                                    100%
Source:  U.S. Department of Health. Education, and Welfare, National Center
         for Educational Statistics, Digest for educational Statistics
         (Washington, D.C., 1975) as cited in Argonne National Laboratory,
         A Framework for Projecting Employment and Population Changes
         Accompanying Energy Development, Phase II, August 1976, prepared
         for the U.S. Energy Research Development Administration, pt 77,
                                     11,2^33

-------



SSS_=i Facility
?reewavs








^^
^ssways





M4:ar R=adg
(Mi30r
trials)








^ 	
?*=or.dary Roads
v-ntt>or. \rtarials)





^ 	
^lector
''eets





x 	
^41 Streets




^ 	
^-
-------
                                                      TABLE  11-26

                                           CHARACTERISTICS OF SHOPPING  CENTERS
                                   Neighborhood Center*
                                                          Community Center*
                                   Regional Center*
    -Major function
                    Sale of convenience goods  and
                    personal services
Some functions of the Neigh-
borhood Center plus sale of
shopping goods (wearing
apparel, appliances, etc.)
                                                                                                 Some  functions  of  Community
                                                                                                 Center  plus  sale of  general
                                                                                                 merchandise,  apparel,  furni-
                                                                                                 ture, etc,
  -• -eading tenants
                    Supermarket and drugstore
Variety store and small
department store
                                                                                                One or more  large, major
                                                                                                department stores
    Location
                               Intersection of collector
                               streets a/a secondary roads
                                                      Intersections of major
                                                      roads and/or expressways
                               Intersections of expressways
                               and/or freeways
           of service area
                                       1/2 mile
                                                                          2 miles
                                                                                                         4 miles
            population to
    s^=cort center
                            4,000
        35,000
                                       150,000
 °- Sice area (gross land area)
 7
                            4-8 acres
                                                             10-30 acres
                                                                                     40-100 acres and over
    Desirable maximum size of
    center as percentage of total
    area served
                            1.25%
                          (1 acre/1,000 pop.)
        100%
    (0.75 acres/1,000 pop,)
                                       0,50%
                               (0,67  acres/1,000  pop.)
of gros» floor area
                                    30,000-75,000 sq. ft.
    100,000-250,000 sq. ft.    4000,000-1,000,000 sq. ft,
    S'-asber of stores and shops
                             5-20
                                                              15-40
                                                                                             40-80
 *•• Parking requirements***       Parking ratio: 4 to 1
                                   (Parking area is four times gross floor area of buildingi 400 sq, ft, per parking space)
^_	                                200-600 spaces                  1,000-3,000 spaces             4,000 and over

    group of commercial establishments, planned, developed, owned and managed as a unit, with off-street parking provided
 °n the property (in direct ratio to the building area), and related in size  (gross floor area) and type of shops to the
 N 4-s srea chat the unit serves - generally in an outlying or suburban territory."  Definition of the Community Builders
 ^••SRcil, CLI.
   he  Community  Builders  Council,  ULI  offers the following  indicators  for  types  and sizes in Shopping Centers  (see Community
  solders  Handbook,  Executive  Edition,  1960, page  217).
    Average Gross Leasable Area
    Ranges in GLA
    Usual Minimum Site Area
    Minimum Support
                                50,000  sq.  ft.
                             30,000-100,000 sq.  ft.
                                   4  acres
                               7,500-40,000 people
   150,000 sq. ft.
100,000-300,000 sq.  ft.
     10 acres
 40,000 to 150,000 people
                                      400,000  sq.  ft.
                            300,000  to over  1,000,000  sq,  ft
                                         30  acres
                                     100,000 people
  ~he CBC recommends a parking  ratio of  3  sq.  ft,  to  1  square foot of  gross  floor area  be used for planning calculations
  °nly.  For operations the parking index  is more  realistic  (see Community Builders  Handbook,  Executive Edition,  1960
  Pages 300-305.)

  Utc«:  George Nez, op.cit.
                                                          II.A-35

-------
                  LIST OF SOURCES FOR INFRASTRUCTURE STANDARDS


1.  Mountain West Research.  Economic/Demographic Assessment Manual.  November
1977.

2.  Argonne National Laboratory.  A Framework for Projecting Employment and
Population Changes Accompanying Energy Development, Phase I and Phase II.
August 1976.

3.  Real Estate Research Corporation.  The Costs of Sprawl, Vol. 1, Literature
Review and Bibliography; Vol. 2, Detailed Cost Analysis.  April 1974.

4.  THK Associates, Inc.  Impact Analysis and Development Patterns  Related to
an Oil Shale Industry.  Denver: February 1974.

5.  Utah Division of Water Resources.  A Study of Impacts of the Alton Pipeline
and Warner Valley Power Development on Community Water Systems in Washington
County, Utah.  Utah: 1977.

6.  Wirth-Berger Associates.  Capital Facilities Study—Powder River Basin.
For Wyoming Department of Economic Planning and Development.  April 1974.

7.  Genge-Call Engineering.  "Five County Area Report on Sewage Treatment
Alternatives" unpublished working paper to be included in "Planning for Growth
in Washington County",  Part of a series of publications resulting from the
Five County 208 Water Quality Study.

8.  National Board of Fire Underwriters.  Bulletin #175.  March 1959,

9.  U.S. Department of the Army, Corps of Engineers.  Community Impact Report;
Chief Joseph Dam, Columbia River, Washington.  Washington, DC: 1974,

10.  Dames & Moore.  Technical Support Document:  Land Use/Socioeconumics> Willow
Bend Project for Shell Oil Company.  December 1978.

11.  Koppelman, Lee, and Joseph DeChiara.   Urban Planning an^JDesign Criteria.
Second Edition.  New York, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1975.

12.  Interim Guide for Environmental Assessment.  Prepared for Department of
Housing and Urban Development.
                                    II.Ar-36

-------
  APPENDIX II.B:  Bibliography #1 - List of Sources Used to Prepare
                  This Manual
     On the following pages is a parti-1 listing of sources reviewed during
this project to prepare the user manual.  Other sources are listed after
Appendix II A., "Infrastructure Standards" and Appendix 1C., "Construction
Worker Case Studies."  Numerous recommended sources of secondary data are
also listed in Chapters 2 through 4 of this manual, which describes the steps
for evaluating the secondary impacts of facilities.

-------
Argonne National Laboratory.  A Framework for Comparative Analysis of Socio-
     Economic Impact, Case I.  ANL/EES-TM-9, December 1976, for U.S. ERDA.

	.  A Framework for Detailed Site-Specific Studies of Local Socio-
     Economic Impacts from Energy Development.  ANL/EES-TM-8, December 1976,
     for U.S. ERDA.

	.  An Approach to Assessing Local Sociocultural Impacts Using Projec-
     tions of Population Growth and Composition.  ANL/EES-TM-24, August 1977,
     for U.S. ERDA.

Bender, Lloyd and George S. Temple,  "Integrated Systems Simulation of Local
     Community Impacts in the Northern Great Plains,"  U.S. EPA, EPA-600/9-77-
     012, November 1977.

Campbell, Kimberly A.  "Case Studies on Energy Impacts, Sweetwater and Uinta
     Counties, Wyoming."  National Association of Counties.

Dames and Moore.  Technical Support Document 7,0, Willow .Bend Project for Shell
     Oil Company;  Land Use/Socioeconomics.  December 1978,

Frendewey, James 0., Jr., David E. Monarchi, and Robert-H,.Taylor.  "Evaluation
     of the Regional Activities Model (RAM)."  Boulder:  University of Colorado,
     Graduate School of Business Administration.  October 15, 1977.

Greene, Marjorie R. and Martha G. Curry-.  "The Management of Social and Economic
     Impacts Associated with the Construction of Large-scale Projects:  Experi-
     ences from the Western Coal Development Communities."  Battelle Pacific
     Northwest Laboratories, June 1977.

Guldberg, Peter H. and Ralph B, D'Agostino.  Growth Effects of Major Land Use
     Projects (Wastewater Facilities).   Volume II:  Summary, Predictive Equa-
     tions, and Worksheets.  For U.S. EPA, Office of Air, Noise, and Radiation,
     May 1978, EPA-450/3-78-014b.

Gulley, David A,  "Forecasting Community Impacts Due to Mineral Development."
     Colorado School of Mines.

Hudson, James Franklin,   Demand for Municipal Services;  Measuring the Effect
     of Service Quality.  Massachusetts Institute of Technology, June 1975,
     Civil Engineering Systems Laboratory,

Knapp,  Jerry W.  and F. Larry Leistritz,   "Resource Demands for Energy Develop-
     ment in the Yellowstone River Basin."  Water Resources Bulletin, June 1978.

Leholm, Arlen, F. Larry Leistritz,  and James S. Wieland.  "Profile of North
     Dakota*a Coal Mine and Electric Power Plant Operating Work Force."  Fargo:
     North Dakota State University, August 1975.

Leistritz, F. Larry, et.al.  "A Model for Projecting Localized Economic,  Demo-
     graphic, and Fiscal Impacts of Large-Scale Projects,"  Western Journal of
     Agricultural Economics, August 1979,
                                         B.l-2

-------
Los Alamos Scientific Laboratory,  A Local Impact Model, LA-6665~MS, January
     1977.

          .  Methodology for the Analysis of the Impacts of Electric Power
     Production in the West.
             A Simulation Model for Boom Town Housing, LA-7324-MS, September
     1978.

     	  .  Summary Description of the BOOMl Model, LA-6424-MS, September
     1976.

     	.  User's Guide to the BOOMl Model, LA-6396-MS, August 1976.
Mountain West Research, Inc.  "Construction Worker Profile."  Summary Report
     for the Old West Regional Commission, December 1975.

Murdock, Steve H,, James S. Wieland, and F, Larry Leistritz,  "An Assessment
     of the Validity of the Gravity Model for Predicting Community Settlement
     Patterns in Rural Energy - Impacted Areas in the West."  Land Economics,
     4 November 1978.

Murphy/Williams Urban Planning and Housing Consultants.  "A Methodology Applied
     to Synthetic Fuels."  For U.S. DOE, December 1977.

Muschett, F. Douglas.  Coal Development in Montana;  Economic and Environmental
     Impacts.  Ann Arbor: University of Michigan, 1977.

The Old West Regional Commission.  Socioeconomic Longitudinal Monitoring Project.

     •  Volume I - Summary, June 1979,

     •  Volume II - Profile of McLean Countyr North Dakota, April 1977,

     •  Volume III - Profile of Platte County, Wyoming, April 1977.

     •  Volume IV - Profile of Wheatland County, Montana, April 1977,

     •  Volume V - Profile of Kimball County, Nebraska, April 1977.

Pennsylvania Power & Light Company,  A Monitoring Study of Community Impacts
     for the Susquehanna Steam Electric Station, Allentown, June 1976,

	.  A Monitoring Study of Community Impact;  An Update/ Allentown,
     December 1978.

Singley, John E.  "A Comparison of Socioeconomic Impacts of Energy Development
     for Eastern and Western Projects,"  Prepared for Urban Systems Research
     and Engineering/ September 21, 1979.
                                       B.l-3

-------
Stenehjem, Erik J. and James E, Metzger.  "Socioeconomic Implications of the
     National Energy Plan;  Comparative Social Costs of Increased Coal Produe<-
     tion to 1985."  Prepared by Argonne National Laboratory, September 1977.

Summers, Gene.  Large Industry in a Rural Area;  Demographic, Economic and
     Social Impacts.  Madison:  University of Wisconsin, 31 August 1973.

United States Energy Research and Development Administration.  "Models and
     Methodologies for Assessing the Impact of Energy Development."  Office
     of Planning, Analysis, and Evaluation, September 1977,

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  Draft Environmental Impact Statement,
     Ideal Basic Industries:  Cement Plant, Theodore Industrial Park, Alabama
     and Limestone Quarry, Monroe County, Alabama, Summary Document.  Region
     IV, 19 May 1978.

     •  Appendix A - Project Description

     •  Appendix B - Baseline

     •  Appendix C - Impacts

     •  Appendix D - Mitigating Actions

     •  Appendix E - Alternatives

	.  Final Environmental Impact Statement, The Pittston Company of New
     York for the Construction of a 250,000 Barrel Per Day Oil Refinery and
     Marine Terminal - Eastport, Maine.  Region I.

     •  Volume I - Executive Summary

     •  Volume II - Final Environmental Impact Statement

     •  Volume III - Supplement to Appendices.

    	.  Environmental Assessment of Construction Grants Projects.  Office
     of Water Program Operations, EPA-430/9<-79-007, January 1979.

    	.  Draft Environmental Impact Statement, Bleached Kraft Market Pulp
     Mill, Near Bon Wier, Texas.  Region 6, June 19, 1979,

    	,  Draft Environmental Impact Statement, Lower Armstrong Power
     Station.  Region 3, December 1978,

    	,  Environmental Impact Assessment Guidelines for Selected New
     Source Industries.  Office of Federal Activities, Washington, October
     1975.

United States Water Resources Council,  Regjlonal Multipliers;   Industry
     Specific Gross Output Multipliers for BEA Economic Areas,  By the
     Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce,  January 1977,
                                     B.l-4

-------
University of Wyoming, Black Thunder Project Research Team.  Final Environmental
     Assessment, Black Thunder Mine Site, October, 1976.

Urban Systems Research & Engineering, Inc.  Development and Application of a
     Methodology for Monitoring Social and Economic Impacts of Demonstration
     Projects:  Methodology for Longitudinal Socioeconomic Monitoring.
     Prepared for U.S. DOE, December 1, 1978, Contract EF-76-C-01-2493.

	.  Induced Impacts of New Source Industries;  Study and EIS Preparation
     Manual Development.  Report #5:  Review of Modeling Literature.   Prepared
     for U.S. EPA, Office of Federal Activities, September 6, 1979, Contract
     8WA-B064,
                                    B.l-S

-------
  APPENDIX II.C:   Bibliography  #2  -  Review of  Modeling  Literature
     On the following pages is a list of the project bibliography developed
during an earlier task of this contract.  A literature search was used to
identify all past research material on models or methodologies for predicting
the induced (secondary) land use, socioeconomic, and environmental impacts of
industry.  The search was directed at both short-term construction and long-
term operating effects.  The literature were searched for methods that projected
not only total growth, but spatial patterns of such growth.

     We retrieved 637 citations.  These were screened for duplication and rele-
vance, and a total of 32 references were reviewed.  These promising sources are
listed on the following pages.  Our review of each of these sources is summar-
ized in our "Review of Modeling Literature" for the Office of Federal Activities,
EPA, under contract WA B064.

     In general, it was found that no comprehensive models for predicting
induced impacts from industries exist.  All models that do address a specific
industry are related to energy developments in western boom towns.  Where
detailed socioeconomic models are available, the input data requirements are
so large that their use is prohibitively expensive.  Elements of socioeconomic,
land use, and environmental impact projection were found scattered throughout
the reports.  Thus, for the user manual, it was necessary to integrate these
elements to produce an induced impacts model which is both informative and
scaled to limited agency resources.
                                       B.2-1

-------
Abt Associates,  Inc,  Manual  for Evaluating Secondary Impacts of Wastewater
     Treatment Facilities, EPAr-600/5~78-003,  (PB">279-153) , Washington, DC,
     February 1978.

Baldwin, T.E. and R. Poetsch.  Approach to Assessing Local Sociocultural Impacts
     Using Projections of Population Growth, ANL/EES-TM-24(NTIS), August 1977.

Baldwin T.E., et.al.  Framework for Detailed Site-Specific Studies of Local
     Socio-Economic Impacts from Energy Development,  ANL/EES-TM-8(NTTS),
     December 1976.

Bascom, S.E., K.G. Cooper, M,P. Howell, A.C. Makrides, and F.T. Rabe.  Secondary
     Impacts of  Transportation.and Wastewater Investments:  Research Results.
     EPA-600/5-75-013, Washington, DC, 1975.

Bascom, S.E,, et.al.  Secondary Impacts of Transportation and Wastewater Invest-
     ments;  Review and Bibliography, EPA-600/5-75-002, Washington, DC, 1975.

Bender L., and G. Temple.  "Integrated Systems Simulation of Local Community
     Impacts in  the Northern  Great Plains,"  Energy Environment II.  EPA-600/
     9-77-012, Washington DC, November 1977.

Benesh, F., P. Guldberg, and  R, D'Agostino.  Growth Effects of Major Land Use
     Projects;   Volume III -  Specification and Causal Analysis of Model.  EPA
     Publication No. EPA-450/3-76-012a, May 1976.

	.  Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects;  Volume III- Summary,
     EPA Publication No. EPA 450/3-76-012c, Research Triangle Park, NC,
     September 1976.

Booz-Allen & Hamilton, Inc.  Methodologies for the Analysis of Secondary Air
     Quality Impacts of Wastewater Treatment Projects Located in Air Quality
     Maintenance Areas,  Contract No, 68-01-2851,  Prepared for EPA Region II,
     New York, NY,  March 1976.

EDA.  Economic Research Studies of the Economic Development Administration,
     PB-265-193/3ST(NTIS), September 1974.

EPA Region IV.  Draft BIS - Ideal Basic Industries, 5 volume set.  PB-285-583-
     SET(NTIS), May 1978.

ERDA.  Models and Methodologies for Assessing the Impact of Energy Development,
     ERDA-77-9KNTIS) , September 1977,

Ford, A.  Summary Description of the BOOM1 Model, LA-6424-MS(NTIS), June 1976.

	.  User's Guide;to the BOOM1 Model, LA-6396*-MS(NTIS) , August 1976.

Ford A., and H. Lorber.   "Methodology for the Analysis of Impacts of Electric
     Power Production in the West,"  Energy/Environment II.  EPA-600/9~77-012,
     Washington DC, November 1977,
                                         B.2-2

-------
Frendwey, J.O., et.al.  Evaluation of the Regional Activities Model  (RAM),
     PB-275-256(NTIS).  October 1977.

Greene, M.R., and M.G. Curry,  Management of Social and Economic Impacts
     Associated with __Construction of Large-Scale Projects.  BNWL<-RAP^16(NTIS) ,
     June 1977.

Guldberg, P. and R. D'Agostino.  Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects
      (Wastewater Facilities) Volume I;  Model Specification and Causal Analysis,
     EPA-450/3-78-014b.  Research Triangle Park, NC, March 1978.

	.  Growth Effects of Major Land Use Projects  (Wastewater Facilities)
     Volume II;  Summary, Predictive Equations, and Worksheets, EPA-450/3-78-
     014b.  Research Triangle Park, NC, May 1978.

Gulley, D.A.  "Forecasting Community Impacts Due to Mineral Extraction -
     Science or Rhetoric,"  Proceedings of the Council of Economics 105th
     Annual Meeting of the American Institute of Mining, Metallurgical and
     Petroleum Engineers.  New York 1976.

Houstoun, L.O.  "Here's What Should Be Done About the Energy-Boom Towns,"
     ASPO Planning Magazine, 4_3_{3) : 18.  March 1977.

Lucci, M., P. deWitt, C. Mitchell, D, McGaw, and R, Pavone.  Handbook for
     Evaluation of Secondary Environmental Impacts of Wastewater Treatment
     Facilities.  Preliminary Draft for U.S. EPA, Municipal Construction
     Division, Washington, DC, July 1977.

McKay, M.D. and L.A. Bruckner.  Local Impact Model, LA-6665-MS(NTIS), January
     1977.

Murphy/Williams Urban Planning and Housing Consultants.  A Methodology Applied
     to Synthetic Fuels.  U.S. Department of Energy, Washington DC, April
     1978.

Promise, J. and M. Leiserson.  Water Resources Management for Metropolitan
     Washington;  Analysis of the Joint Interactions of Water and Sewer
     Service, Public Policy, and Land Development Patterns in an Expanding
     Metropolitan Area (including Appendices),  Washington DC, Metropolitan
     Washington Council of Governments, 1973.

Real Estate Research Corporation.  The Costs of Sprawl - Environmental and
     Economic Costs of Alternative Residential Development Patterns at the
     Urban Fringe, prepared for the Council on Environmental Quality,
     Washington DC, April 1974.

Rink, R. and A. Ford.  Simulation Model for Boom Town Housing, LA-7324-MS(NTIS),
     September 1978.

Stenehjem, E., et.al.  Framework for Comparative Analyses- of Socioeconomic
     Impact;  Caae I.  ANL/EES-TM-9(NTIS), December 1976.
                                      B.2-3

-------
Summers, G.F.  Large Industry in a Rural Area;  Demographic, Economic and
     Social Impact.  University of Wisconsin, August 1973 (NTIS COM-74-10214).

Toman, N., S. Murdock, and T. Hertsgaard.  REAP Economic Demographic Model:
     Technical Description (Draft).  North Dakota State University, Bismarck,
     ND, 1978.

Urban Systems Research & Engineering, Inc.  Interceptor Sewers and Suburban
     Sprawl;  The Impact of Construction Grants on Residential Land Use,
     Volume I; Analysis, and Volume II;  Case Studies.  Prepared for the
     Council on Environmental Quality, Washington DC, May 1978,

	.   The Growth Shapers - Land Use Impacts of Infrastructure Investments.
     Prepared for the Council on Environmental Quality, Washington DC, May 1976.
                                  B-. 2-4

-------
 APPENDIX II.D:   Glossary


 air pollution:   the presence  of contaminants  in the air, particularly at
      concentrations which  interfere  with  health,  safety, or comfort.

 air quality:  a  measure  of the  characteristics of the air, usually  derived
      from quantitative measurements  of  the  concentrations of  specific pollu-
      tants .

 air quality control region (AQCR):   a geographical unit designated  by state
      agencies as the  appropriate unit to  implement and monitor control
      strategies.  AQCRs  may cross state boundaries.

 algorithm:  a procedure  or mathematical formulation which specifies a series
      of  steps to a solution.

 ambient:  surrounding, e.g.,  the ambient  air.

 amortization:  to write  off an  expenditure  by prorating it over a fixed  period;
      the  .amortization, period is often  equal to the term of the loan  used to
      finance the expenditure.

 aquifer:  an underground bed  or stratum of  earth, gravel, or  stone  that  con-
      tains water.

 area  source:  a  group of point  or line  sources that individually do not  warrant
      a separate  accounting, and which are grouped together as an area source.

 areawide  environmental assessment:   prepared by some EPA regional officers, this
     document identifies, principally by means of overlays, sensitive features
      in a given geographic  area.

 assessed value:  the value  of land and  improvements.  This value is established
      for property tax purposes.   Assessed value is not necessarily  equal to fair
     market value.

 assessment:   the process of forecasting and measuring effects a development project
     may have on the social,  economic, and physical environment.

 attainment:    a term used to  designate an area in compliance with a primary
     national ambient air quality standard  (NAAQS) for a specific, criteria
     pollutant.

average household size:  the  average number of persons per occupied housing
     unit.

base map:  a map or chart showing the location of important geographic and
     economic features.  These maps are often used as a base upon which
     additional data of a specialized nature are overlaid.
                                        IID-1

-------
 baseline:  the baseline refers to social, economic, or other activity
      which is forecasted to occur in the absence of the project being
      reviewed.

 basic (economic) activities:  activities which produce and distribute goods
      and services for export to firms and individuals outside of a defined
      economic region.

 carrying costs:   the cost to finance an expenditure.  As used in this manual,
      carrying costs include principal plus interest.

 central city:  1)   a city of 50,000 inhabitants or more which is the core
      of an urbanized area;  2)  the largest city in an SMSA.

 coastal zone:  as  defined in the Coastal Zone Management Act of 1972, the term
      coastal zone  means the coastal waters,  and adjacent shorelands, strongly
      influenced  by each other and in proximity to the shorelines of the
      coastal states.  A coastal zone includes islands,  transitional and inter-
      tidal areas,  salt marshes, wetlands,  and beaches.   The zone extends
      inward from shorelines only to the extent necessary to control shorelands
      the uses of which have a direct and significant impact on the coastal
      waters.

 coefficient:   a  number used as  a multiplier.

 commutershed/commuting radius:   the commuting radius is the distance from the
      site of  the facility or project which defines  the  area from which  people
      may commute to  work at the site.   Commuting radius may be defined  either
      by  distance in  miles or by travel  time.   The commuting area so defined
      is  tne commutershed.   The  commuting radius  may not be equidistant  in all
      directions  from the site,  because  of  physical or topographical features
      or  boundaries,  and therefore the commutershed  is not  necessarily symmet-
      rical  in shape.

 comprehensive plan:   an official  document  adopted as a  policy  guide to  deci-
      sions  about the physical,  social,  and economic development  of  a community
      or  region.

 criteria pollutants:  airborne pollutants which  are addressed  under Section
      108 of the Clean Air Act.  These pollutnats  currently include  total
      suspended particulates, nitrogen dioxide, sulfur   dioxide,  carbon monoxide,
      ozone and hydrocarbons.  NAAQS have been established  for these pollutants.

 default value:  in this manual, a default value  is  a value  supplied by us for
      a specific variable (such as average household size)  in those cases when
      you do not wish to calculate a value based upon data  for the specific
      impact area.

demography:  the science of population growth and change.

design life:  the period for which equipment or a facility can be expected to
     perform adequately.
                                         IID-2

-------
direct:  see primary.

discounting:  used in capital investment decisions, discounting converts
     future revenues or expenditures to their present value, i.e., their
     value at the present time.  The revenue or expenditure in a future
     year is multiplied by the present value of $1 for that year at the
     required rate of return; the rate of return is also termed the dis-
     count rate.

EA:  environmental assessment.

economic base analysis:  a modeling technique used to estimate future
     economic and population growth.  This technique is the basis for
     regional income and employment multipliers.  Economic base analysis
     assumes that any regional economy is divided into basic (export-
     oriented) and service (locally-oriented) firms.  Growth in service
     firms is a function of growth in the basic sector.  Growth in the
     basic sector is a function of population growth, and national and
     regional economic trends.

economic sector:  a group of firms, establishments, or enterprises engaged
     in similar economic activities.  Major economic sectors are agriculture,
     forestry, and fishing; minings contruction; manufacturing; transportation,
     communications, electric, gas, and sanitary services; wholesale trade;
     retail trade; finance, insurance, and real estate; services; public
     administration.

EIS:  environmental impact statement, as defined in section 102(2)(C) of the
     National Environmental Policy Act of 1969.  The Statement is required
     to cover 1)  the environmental impact of the proposed action, 2) adverse
     environmental effects of the project that cannot be avoided, 3) alterna-
     tives to the proposed action, 4) the relationship between local short-term
     uses of man's environment and the maintenance and enhancement of long-term
     productivity, 5) any irreversible and irretrievable commitments of resources
     which would be involved in the proposed action.

emissions:  the discharge of air contaminants into the atmosphere.

emission factor:  an estimate of the rate at which a pollutant is released to
     the atmosphere. It is generally expressed as the quantity of pollutants
     emitted for some unit measure of polluting activity.

emission standard:  the maximum amount of a pollutant legally permitted to be
     discharged from a single source.

employment participation rate:  a mathematical expression measuring the percen-
     tage of a total population that is employed.  It may be derived by dividing
     total employment by total population or the total civilian labor force.
                                        IID-3

-------
endangered species:  any species identified as rare or- endangered by the U.S.
     Fish and Wildlife Service, State Departments of Fish and Game, the
     Audubon Society, the National Wildlife Federation, and university depart-
     ments of zoology, wildlife management, or biology.

environmental  assessment:  a concise public document for which EPA is respon-
     sible which provides sufficient data and analysis to determine whether
     an EIS or a finding of no significant impact is required.  Where EPA
     determines that an EIS will be prepared, there is no need to prepare a
     formal environmental assessment.  More generally, an environmental
     assessment can refer to any document which forecasts or measures the
     impacts of a project upon the environment.

environmental information document:  any written analysis prepared by an
     applicant or contractor for EPA which describes the environmental impacts
     of a proposed action, or which provides any information necessary for EPA
     to carry out an environmental review.

evaluation:  a determination of the importance of a measured or forecasted
     impact.  Evaluation often implies a selection among several different
     alternatives.

exogenous variable:  a variable the value of which is not determined by the
     solution of the equations in a mathematical model, i.e., the value of the
     variable is determined outside of the model.

FNSI:  finding of no significant impact.  Previously referred to as a negative
     declaration.

gravity model:  a representation of any type of interaction which postulates
     that the attraction between two areas of activity is a function of a
     pertinent variable in one, and that this attraction is inversely related
     to the distance between the two areas.

groundwater:  the supply of fresh water under the earth's surface in an aquifer
     or in soil that forms a natural reservoir.

household:  all persons occupying a discrete housing unit.

household formation:  the establishment of new households by marriage.

housing unit:  a house, apartment, group of rooms, or a single room, which is
     occupied, or vacant but intended for occupancy as separate living quarters.
     The occupants of a unit must eat and live separately from other persons in
     the structure, and must have either direct access to the unit from outside
     or through a common hall, or have kitchen facilities for their exclusive
     use.  Occupied quarters which do not qualify  as housing units are classi-
     fied as group quarters.
                                         IID-4

-------
impact area:  1) Level A - the county containing the new facility  (the host
     county), and any county contiguous to the host county;  2) Level B -
     the county containing the new facility  (the host county)/ and any other
     counties in the facility's commutershed which are expected to contribute
     to the facility's labor pool;  3) Le_yel_C - all communities within the
     normal daily commuting radius of the site of the new facility.

incidence:  the distribution of impacts among groups or individuals.

indirect:  see secondary.

induced demand or impact:  1) new economic activity generated as a consequence
     of the expansion of other economic activity; 2) any impact caused or
     brought on by some other activity or impact.

infrastructure:  the basic economic and social installations or facilities of
     a community.  Examples include roads, sewers and water supply, schools and
     public transit systems.

input coefficient:  the amount of inputs required froir. each industry to produce
     one dollar of output from a given industry.

input-output analysis:  a mathematical technique used to describe and predict
     transactions among industries in a national or regional economy.  A basic
     input-output table is shown on the next page — this table portrays the
     flow of goods and services throughout the economy, and provides a means
     of measuring both the direct and indirect changes in production resulting
     from a change in demand.

labor force:  that portion of the total population over 16 years old and which
     is not retired.  The labor force includes employed and unemployed persons.

labor market area:  the geographic area within which the majority of employees
     engaged in a given economic activity reside.  Labor market areas vary by
     type of activity; for example, construction workers are typically drawn
     from a larger area than factory workers.

land use map:  a map which shows dominant land uses by type of activity, such
     as residential, commercial/service/retail, manufacturing/warehouse, and
     public land.

line source:  an emission source which follows a linear configuration, such
     as a road, rail line, or runway.  Constant emission rates along the line
     are not necessarily assumed.

marginal:  additional; in economics, 'marginal cost* of a product is the cost
     of producing one additional unit of that proudct, and marginal revenue is
     the revenue derived from the sale of an additional unit.
                                        IID-5

-------
             (CHASGfSAGAtnSrCNPl
GNP
      •t^m.ili Hi pi»t»«la«Ms. less utsrfas. etc.

      US DcpjiliwBl til CMMUI«. Bwuii ti [COMHUC Aiuliu
 /            /   <*«»"    /
/            /   «iJ>«    /


f            /    '     f
                                                                                                                                                                   CHART  11
                                                                            INPUT-OUTPUT  TABLE
H
H
O

cn

PRODUCERS
Q
Lbl
Q
0
•* «_
4J MlJ — *
B s -^
g5 ag
:>•*«'«»'—'


*tncu«ult
UMIH
CoubuduM
Uinululuiia|
llii»|tfUbMI
llitt
FnUMC
Seivices
Oilier
PfiODUCERS
Aflicul
lure









CompenubM «l employees
Ibniflt










Constiuc
boa










Piofillype mount*, net mleiesl ( ufuUI consumption »Uowa
laihreU business Uus
GROSS INPUT






•lUnuUc
luiim










nets


ffMS
pw-
Uboa








*




Tilde













finance













Sendees













Olhei













FINAL DEMAND (GNP)
Personal
consumption
eipendiluies












boss
ptrtile
dontsbc
m>tslmenl









Net eipo/U










Gweinmuil
puithists










GROSS
OUTPUT










                       MCIMU. t«M UCMU <4 pciuM. UHfaait futUH. M4 tuiiKU luml« Kinuoli. lest ukvtev n

                                                                                                                                                      Uesld«ml>a .................
                                                                                                                                                     Change in buifneis Inve iKurlt
                                                                                                                                                      Nonluiro ...................

                                                                                                                                                   Net ei|H>rtg o( (oodt kiid wivlce
                                                                                                                                                                                                    Qatit. tiuiclaattol foodauul u-i
                                                                                                                                                                                                      Blhlt tir.rt Iwal
                                                                                                                                                                                                     II y l
                                                                                                                                                                                                                . lotj
                                                                                                                                                                                                           Nr.i.4ui kl.
                                                                                                                                                   (Jioti n*l)bf.fcl [jwlucl. Idikll ..
                                                                                                                                                                                                        line

                                                                                                                                                                                                        Wervltti

                                                                                                                                                                                                      OrtiM
                                                                                                                                                                                                              liivrslmeru
                                                                                                                                                                                                          NollieslJtntlU
                                                                                                                                                                                                             .       .............
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Cliutitle 111 builnm Invelilotl

                                                                                                                                                                                                       Net ti\Hjtta ol good* uid etivk

                                                                                                                                                                                                                            l Wilt W
                                                                                                                                                                                                       UdVt. lUU
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Federal
                                                                                                                                                                                                        Him* uuil loc»J
                                                                                                                                                      ' Uevlitd.    * l*ctlirnlnuy
                                                                                                                                                    Mid |*uonbi liubut loivc l.i i n 1

-------
migration:  the number of people moving into  (immigration) or out of  (out-
     migration) an area over a specified time period.

mitigation:  any technique which minimizes, makes less severe, or moderates
     a primary or secondary impact of a facility or project.

model:  as used in this manual, a model is a detailed set of relationships,
     often set down in mathematical terms, intended as a synthetic represen-
     tation ofithe behavior of social, economic, or environmental systems.
     A model is used to test hypotheses or to predict the effects of change
     in some element of the system.

(employment/income) multiplier:  a mathematical technique used to estimate
     the impact of a project on a regional economy.  The technique is based
     on the concepts of economic base analysis.  A multiplier provides a
     means of estimating the direct and indirect increase in employment or
     income resulting from the construction or operation of a facility.

NAAQS:  national ambient air quality standards.  The prescribed level of
     pollutants in the air which cannot legally be exceeded during a specific
     time (usually either 24 hours or 3 days) in a defined geographic area.
     NAAQS were mandated by the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1970.

National Register of Historic Places:  a listing maintained by the Heritage
     Conservation and Recreation Service of architectural, historical, archeo-
     logical, and cultural sites of local, state, or national significance.

NEPA:  National Environmental Policy Act of 1969.  Section 102 establishes
     requirements for and outlines the contents of environmental impact
     statements.  These statements are to accompany every recommendation or
     report on proposals for legislation and other 'major federal actions'
     significantly affecting the quality of the human environment.

new source:  a new source is any source which is constructed or substantially
     modified after the publication of an emission or effluent standard that
     applies to that source.  All other sources are considered to be 'existing'.

new source determination:  a determination by an environmental reviewer that
     a facility qualifies as a new source:  A new source is defined as "any
     source constructed after publication of a standard that applies to that
     source".  All other sources are considered to be 'existing1.

nominal interest rate:  the interest rate charged on a loan, as opposed to the
     real interest rate, which is the true rate after adjustment for inflation.
     Example:  assume a company receives a bank loan at a 20% prime rate, and that
     the rate of inflation is 12%.  The nominal interest rate is 20%, the real
     interest rate is 8% (20% minus 12%).
                                         IID-7

-------
 nonattainment:   a term used to designate an area which is not in compliance
      with a primary NAAQS for a specific criteria pollutant.

 NSPS:  emission or effluent standards set for new sources, i.e., new source
      performance standards.

 occupancy rate:  the number of persons per room,  dwelling, or household.

 open space:  land that is not predominantly occupied by buildings or structures

 operation area:  the area  the boundaries of which enclose the site of the
      facility and its associated infrastructures  (such as barge landings,
      rail sidings,  or facilities for self-generation of power).

 point source:   in air and water pollution,  a stationary emitter of large
      quantities of a pollutant, generally as a result of industrial activity.

 pollutant:   any material  adversely  affecting the  natural or man-made environ-
      ment.   Noise, light,  and radiation can also be considered pollutants.

 population  density:   population per unit of land  area,  often  expressed as
      either persons  or families per acre.

 primary  impacts or effects:   the direct and immediate effects on the social,
      economic,  and physical  environment caused by the construction or opera-
      tion of a  facility.   These effects are experienced in the  immediate
      vicinity of the project or its related infrastructure.   Also  known as
      direct impacts,   in  economic terms,  a  primary  impact  is  the first order
      spending for materials  or labor related to the  construction or operation
      of  a project.

 PSD:  prevention of  significant deterioration.  The  PSD regulations,  adopted
      in  the  1977  Clean Air Act Amendments and  also a required part of all
      SIPs,  divide areas into  Classes  I,  II,  and III,  Class  I  having the
      cleanest air.   PSD regulations  specify the maximum allowable  increases
      in  ambient  concentrations  of pollutants -  these  increases are  termed
      PSD  increments  - for each  area, and are designed to prevent a  significant
      deterioration of air quality.

reserve capacity:  capacity included in wastewater treatment plants, water
      supply systems, and other  infrastructure facilities beyond that needed
      to serve current connections.  Reserve capacity is, therefore, intended
      to accommodate future growth.                    •

runoff:  the water that flows off of the surface of the land in visible surface
      streams.  Runoff usually refers to the rainfall, melted snow, or irriga-
     tion water  that flows across the ground surface and eventually returns to
     a surface body of water.  The runoff often picks up pollutants from the
     air or land and carries them to the receiving waters.
                                        IID-8

-------
scoping:  a process which -determines the scope of issues to be addressed
     in an EIS, and which identifies the significant issues related to a
     proposed action.  See 40 CFR 1500 to 1508, "Regulations for Implement-
     ing the Procedural Provisions of NEPA.!'

secondary impacts or effects:  1) in economic terms, the second and successive
     rounds of purchases by those firms or individuals which supply the direct
     requirements of a facility   (see direct impacts).  In this context,
     secondary impacts are synonymous with multiplier effects, and include
     expenditures by households whose jobs or income are traceable to a
     facility's direct purchases; 2) as defined in Section 1.2 of this manual,
     secondary impacts of a project or facility are indirect or induced
     changes in the physical or social environment.  Secondary impacts are
     triggered by direct  (primary) impacts.  Secondary impacts occur off-site
     from a project or any associated infrastructure  (such as barge landings
     or rail facilities) which is an essential part of the operation of the
     project.

service area:  the geographic area served by a particular public facility,
     such as a school, library, police station, or park.

service sector:  the service sector for the purposes of Step 15, Level C,
     includes all retail trade activities (SICs 52-59), and:

     o  personal services such as laundry services, beauty and barber
        shops (SIC 72)
     o  automotive repair services and garages (SIC 75)
     o  miscellaneous repair services, such as electrical repair, watch
        repair, or furniture repair (SIC 76).
     This definition should be used for Step 15.   A good land use map will
     distinguish retail/commercial/service activities from other activities
     in an area.  At a minimum, retail activities should be broken out of
     this larger category; it may be difficult, however, to break out the
     specific services listed above, in which case retail trade activities
     can be used as an accurate proxy for the service sector.

SIC:  standard industrial classification.  All firms in the United States
     are classified by a four-digit SIC.

significant:  in impact assessment the term refers to the relative importance
     of a measured or forecasted impact.

socioeconomic (impacts):  refers to social and economic impacts.   Social
     impacts include effects on community cohesion; the stress of assimilation
     of new population; and increased demand for infrastructure such as schools
     or hospitals.  Economic impacts include direct and indirect employment;
     expansion of the service sector;  or increases in regional spending.
                                        IID-9

-------
soil loss equation:  an equation used to determine the amount of soil which
     will erode from a given area of land over time under varying conditions
     of rainfall, slope, soil type, land use practices, etc.

SMSA:  standard metropolitan statistical area.  Each SMSA is an integrated
     social and economic unit with a large population nucleus.  An SMSA is
     defined along county lines and must include:

     o  one city with 50,000 or more inhabitants, or
     o' a city with at least 25,000 inhabitants which, together with
        contiguous places has a combined population of 50,000.

     The largest city in each SMSA is designated as the "central city".  In
     New England, SMSAs are defined along town and city lines, rather than
     county lines.  There is no limit to the number of adjacent counties that
     can be included in an SMSA, and SMSAs can cross state lines.

state implementation plan (SIP):  required by the Clean Air Act Amendments of
     1970.  National ambient air quality standards (NAAQS) were established
     for six criteria pollutants (see NAAQS).  Each state is required to submit
     a plan acceptable to EPA which discusses the strategies that will be used
     to achieve and maintain these standards  in regions where these standards
     are or might be exceeded.  EPA will provide a plan for those states which
     do not develop an acceptable one.

surface water:  the streams, lakes, ponds/ and oceans which occur on the surface
     of the earth.

208:  the Section of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (PL 92-500) that
     mandates areawide water quality management plans.

208 plan:  a plan for areawide water quality management completed and
     implemented by the responsible planning agency ("The 208 Agency").

unemployed person:  those persons who did no work, were looking for work, and
     were available for work during a given period.  Also included are those
     who did no work during the period and a)  were awaiting to be called back
     to work from which they had been laid off, b) were waiting to report to
     a new job starting within 30 days, c)  were prevented from looking for work
     because of temporary illness.

vacancy rate:  the ratio between the number of vacant housing units and the
     total number of units in an area.  The gross vacancy rate counts every
     empty unit.  The available vacancy rate excludes units off the market,
     and seasonal or dilapidated housing.

VMT:  vehicle miles traveled.  The total number of miles traveled by all
     vehicles over a given roadway or on all roadways within a specified area
     during a given time period.
                                           IID-10

-------
watershed:  the region drained by or contributing water to a stream, lake/
     or other body of water.

wetlands:  land areas characterized by the presence of water at or near the
     surface during portions of the year; wetlands are characterized by vege-
     tation adapted to wet conditions.

zoning;  the demarcation of a city by ordinance into zones and the establish-
     ment of regulations to govern the use of the land within the zones.
                                          IID-11

-------
                         REFERENCES FOR GLOSSARY
Alan M. Voorhees and Associates.  Notebook 5; Environmental Assessment Reference
     Book.  Prepared for U.S. Department of Transportation, 1979.

Jonathan S. Lane, et.al.  Impact Assessment Guidelines; The Role of the No-Build
     Alternative in the Evaluation of Transportation Projects.  Prepared for the
     National Cooperative Highway Research Program, 1977.

Skidmore, Owings, and Merrill.  Guidance Notebooks for the Environmental Assess-
     ment of Airport Development Projects.  Prepared for the U.S. Department of
     Transportation, 1978.
                                        IID-12

-------